HP Hewlett Packard Cell Phone Accessories E6380 90019 User Manual

HP 8935 CDMA Cellu la r /P CS Ba se Sta t ion  
Test Set  
R efer en ce Gu id e  
F ir m w a r e Ver sion : A.01.00 a n d a b ove  
HP Part Number E6380-90019  
R e vision A  
P r in t ed in U.S.A.  
Novem b er 1997  
© Copyright 1997 Hewlett-Packard Company  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con t en t s  
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
In This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Conventions Used in this Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
1. Get t in g St a r t ed  
Before Connecting a Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Changing the Test Sets Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Changing the Measurement Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Changing the Control Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly? . . . . . . . . . 31  
Instrument Quick Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
2. Op er a t in g Over view  
Displaying CDMA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Channel Power, Rho, EVM, Average Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Code Domain Measurements (Power, Timing, Phase) . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Displaying Analog Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
RF Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Displaying AF Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Displaying Analog Measurement Results on a Meter Scale . . . . . . 39  
Using Channel Numbers to Set Analyzer and Generator Frequencies 40  
Calibrating the Channel Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Changing the Increment or Decrement Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Specifying An Increment Value for the Arrow Keys or Knob . . . . . 42  
Using the Factor of 10 Increment/Decrement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Using Measurement Limit Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Setting A Measurement Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Averaging Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
How the Test Set Averages Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Register Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Memory Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Instrument Hardware Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Using USER Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Using Pre-Defined USER Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Assigning and Releasing USER Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Replacing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
3. Over view of t h e Test Set s  
Bu ilt-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Swept Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Discrete Freq Insertion Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Swept Insertion Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Swept Return Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Cable Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Replot Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
3
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con ten t s  
Transfer Stored Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
SA (spectrum analyzer) Self Calibration ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Catalog PC (Memory) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Set Up Printer/Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Using the Code Domain Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Selecting the Code Domain Analyzers Controls Menus . . . . . . . . . 67  
Using the Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Automatic Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Setting Resolution Bandwidth and Sweep Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Selecting the Spectrum Analyzers Controls Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Using the Voltmeter and Audio Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Using the Oscilloscope (Scope) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Selecting the Oscilloscopes Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Selecting the Oscilloscopes Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Triggering the Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Using the Oscilloscopes Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Using IB_UTIL Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
COPY_PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
FILE_XFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
RAM_USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Securing a Test Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Clearing RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Using the LISTOPTS (list options) Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Using the DEMO Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Using the ST_PLT (store or plot) Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
4. CDMA Mea su r em en t s - Scr een s  
a n d Con t r ol F ield s  
CDMA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Average Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Channel Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Rho Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Code Domain Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
ADCfs or ADC FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Analyzer (CDMA analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Analyzer (code domain analyzer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Anl Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Anl Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Auto Zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Car FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Chn Pwr Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
CW RF Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Data Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Data Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Even Sec In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
4
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con t en t s  
Freq Err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Gen Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Gen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Gen Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Input Atten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Input Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Lvl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Meas Intvl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Num Avgs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Ofs Trnsfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
PN Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Pwr Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Pwr Intvl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Pwr Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Pwr Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Qual Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
RF Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
RF Gen Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
RF In/Ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Time Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
TmOfs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Trig Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Tune Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Walsh Chan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
5. An a log Mea su r em en t s - Scr een s  
a n d Con t r ol F ield s  
Analog Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
AC Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
AM Depth Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
AF Freq Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
DC Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Distn (Distortion) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
FM Deviation Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Frequency Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Frequency Error Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
TX Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
FM Deviation Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
AF Freq (Audio Frequency) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
SINAD Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
SNR Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Control Fields for Analog Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
AF Anl In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
AF Cnt Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
AFGen1 Freq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
5
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con ten t s  
AFGen1 To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
AFGen2 Freq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
AFGen2 To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Atten Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Audio In Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Audio Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Auto/Norm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Auto Zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Center Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Cont/Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
De-Emp Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
De-Emphasis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Ext Load R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Filter 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Filter 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
FM Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Freq (marker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Gain Cntl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
IF Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Input Atten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Input Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Input Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Level (div) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Lvl (marker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Marker To Peak+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Marker To Peak-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Marker To (spectrum analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Mod In To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
No Pk/Avg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Normalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Notch Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Notch Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Offset Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Pk Det To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Port/Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Ref Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
RF Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
RF Cnt Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
RF Gen Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
RF In/Ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Scope To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Sensitivity (RF analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
6
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con t en t s  
Sensitivity (spectrum analyzer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Settling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Span. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Speaker ALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Speaker Vol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Squelch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Time/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Track/Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Trig-Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Tune Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
TX Pwr Meas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
TX Pwr Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Vert/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Vert Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
6. Con figu r a tion - Scr een s a n d Con tr ol F ield s  
Configuring the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Setting the Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Changing the Beepers Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Turning Off User Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Configuring for Printing A Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Printing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Abort Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Antenna In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Base Freq (User Defined). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Chan Space (User Defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Data Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Display User Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Duplex Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Ext Ref In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
FF at End: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
FF at Start: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Frame Clock Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
(Gen)-(Anl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
(Gen)-(Anl) (User Defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
HP-IB Adrs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
IBASIC Echo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Inst Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Lines/Page: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Model: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Notch Coupl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Opt CDMA TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
7
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con ten t s  
Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Printer Port: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Print Title:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Range Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Ref Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
RF Chan Std . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
RF Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
RF Gen Volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
RF In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
RF Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
RF Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Save/Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Serial Baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Serial_9 In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Serial No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Stop Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Total RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
7. Con n ector s  
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
10 MHz REF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
16 × CHIP CLOCK 19.6608 MHz OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
ANALOG MODULATION IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
ANT IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
AUDIO IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
AUDIO OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
BASEBAND OUT (I and Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Chassis Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
CHIP CLOCK 1.2288 MHz OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
DATA IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
DUPLEX OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
EXT REF IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
EXT SCOPE TRIG IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
FRAME CLOCK OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
HP-IB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
MEMORY CARD Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
PARALLEL PORT 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
PARALLEL PORT 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
RF IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
SCOPE MONITOR OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
SERIAL PORTs 9, 10, and 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
VIDEO OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
8. Accessor ies, Ma n u a ls, Su p p or t  
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
8
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con t en t s  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Manuals (English and non-English) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Test Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
HP Support for Your Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Customer Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
9. E r r or Messa ges  
General Information About Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Positive Numbered Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Negative Numbered Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
IBASIC Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
HP-IB Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Text Only Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
The Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Non-Recoverable Firmware Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Text Only Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
9
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con ten t s  
10  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P r od u ct In for m a t ion  
11  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufacturer’s  
Declaration  
This statement is provided to comply with the requirements of the  
German Sound Emission Directive, from 18 J anuary 1991.  
This product has a sound pressure emission (at the operator position)  
< 70 dB(A).  
Sound Pressure Lp < 70 dB(A).  
At Operator Position.  
Normal Operation.  
According to ISO 7779:1988/EN 27779:1991 (Type Test).  
Herstellerbescheinigung  
Diese Information steht im Zusammenhang mit den Anforderungen der  
Maschinenlärminformationsverordnung vom 18 J anuar 1991.  
Schalldruckpegel Lp < 70 dB(A).  
Am Arbeitsplatz.  
Normaler Betrieb.  
Nach ISO 7779:1988/EN 27779:1991 (Typprüfung).  
12  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
GENERAL  
Considerations  
This product and related documentation must be reviewed for  
familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation.  
This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC  
Publication 1010, "Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring  
Apparatus," and has been supplied in a safe condition. This instruction  
documentation contains information and warnings which must be  
followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the  
product in a safe condition.  
SAFETY EARTH GROUND  
A uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main  
power source to the product input wiring terminals, power cord, or  
supplied power cord set.  
CHASSIS GROUND TERMINAL  
To prevent a potential shock hazard, always connect the chassis ground  
terminal to earth ground when operating this instrument from a dc  
power source.  
SAFETY SYMBOLS  
Indicates instrument damage can occur if indicated operating limits are  
exceeded. Refer to the instructions in this guide.  
!
Indicates hazardous voltages.  
Indicates earth (ground) terminal  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
A WAR NING n ot e d e n ot es a h a za r d . It ca lls a tt en t ion to a  
p r oced u r e, p r a ct ice, or t h e lik e, w h ich , if n ot cor r ectly  
p er for m e d or a d h er ed to, cou ld r esu lt in p er son a l in ju r y. Do n ot  
p r oceed b eyon d a WAR NING sign u n t il th e in d ica t ed con d ition s  
a r e fu lly u n d e r st ood a n d m et.  
A CAUTION note denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operation  
procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or  
adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the  
product. Do not proceed beyond an CAUTION note until the indicated  
conditions are fully understood and met.  
13  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Considerations for this Instrument  
WARNING  
Th is p r od u ct is a Sa fet y Cla ss I in st r u m en t (p r ovid ed w it h a  
!
p r ote ct ive ea r th in g gr ou n d in cor p or a te d in th e p ow er cor d ).  
Th e m a in s p lu g sh a ll on ly b e in ser t ed in a sock et ou t let  
p r ovid e d w ith a p r ot ect ive ea r th con t a ct . An y in t er r u p t ion of  
th e p r ote ct ive con d u ctor in sid e or ou t sid e of t h e p r od u ct is  
lik e ly t o m a k e t h e p r od u ct d a n ger ou s. In t en t ion a l in t er r u p t ion  
is p r oh ib it ed .  
Do n ot exp ose to or op er a te t h is in st r u m en t in ou td oor  
a tm osp h er ic con d it ion s su ch a s d ir e ct r a in , h a il, sleet , sn ow ,  
icin g, su n sh in e or w in d . Op e r a t e th is in str u m e n t on ly w it h in its  
sp ecified t em p e r a tu r e h u m id it y con d ition s.  
!
!
Th is in str u m en t is eq u ip p e d w it h in t er n a l gr ou n d fa u lt cir cu it  
in t er r u p t er cla ss A.  
Th is d evice d oes n ot p r otect a ga in st e lect r ica l sh ock d u e to  
con t a ct w ith b ot h cir cu it con d u ctor s or a fa u lt in su p p ly  
w ir in g to p r od u ct .  
Do n ot u se ext en sion cor d to con n ect th is p r od u ct t o p ow er  
r ecep ta cle. At ten tion -n e p a s u tiliser d e r a llon ge p ou r  
r a ccor d er le d ete ct eu r -d isjon ct eu r a la p r ise d e cou r a n t .  
R ep la ce cor d se t on ly w ith H P 8120 se r ie s. Att en t ion -  
R em p la cer u n iq u e m en t p a r u n cor d on a m ovible n u m e r o  
8120.  
Do n ot u se in w et loca t ion . Ne p a s u tilise r d a n s u n  
em p la cem en t m ou ille.  
WARNING  
Wh en ever it is lik ely th a t th e p r ot ection h a s bee n im p a ir ed , th e  
in str u m en t m u st b e m a d e in op er a t ive a n d b e secu r ed a ga in st  
a n y u n in te n d e d op e r a t ion .  
If t h is in st r u m en t is t o b e e n er gized via a n a u tot r a n sfor m e r (for  
volta ge r ed u ction ), m a k e su r e t h e com m on te r m in a l is  
con n ected to th e ea r th t er m in a l of th e p ow er sou r ce.  
If th is p r od u ct is n ot u sed a s sp ecified , t h e p r otection p r ovid ed  
by th e e qu ip m e n t cou ld b e im p a ir ed . Th is p r od u ct m u st b e u sed  
in a n or m a l con d ition (in w h ich a ll m ea n s for p r ot ection a r e  
in t a ct) on ly.  
No op er a tor ser vicea b le p a r ts in th is p r od u ct. R efer ser vicin g t o  
qu a lified p er son n el. To p r eve n t elect r ica l sh ock , d o n ot r em ove  
cover s.  
14  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ser vicin g in st r u ct ion s a r e for u se b y q u a lified p e r son n el on ly.  
To a void ele ct r ica l sh ock , d o n ot p er for m a n y ser vicin g u n less  
you a r e q u a lified t o d o so.  
Th e op en in g of cover s or r em ova l of p a r t s is lik ely to exp ose  
d a n ger ou s volt a ges. Discon n e ct t h e p r od u ct fr om a ll volt a ge  
sou r ces w h ile it is b ein g op en e d .  
Ad ju stm e n t s d escr ib ed in t h e m a n u a l a r e p er for m ed w ith  
p ow e r su p p lied t o t h e in st r u m en t w h ile p r ot ective cove r s a r e  
r em ove d . En er gy a va ila b le a t m a n y p oin t s m a y, if con t a cte d ,  
r esu lt in p e r son a l in ju r y.  
Th e p ow er cor d is con n ect ed to in t er n a l ca p a cit or s th a t m y  
r em a in live for 5 secon d s a fter d iscon n e ct in g t h e p lu g fr om it s  
p ow e r su p p ly.  
F or Con tin u ed p r otection a ga in st fir e h a za r d , r ep la ce th e lin e  
fu se (s) on ly w ith 250 V fu se (s) or t h e sa m e cu r r e n t r a tin g a n d  
t yp e (for e xa m p le , n or m a l b low or tim e d ela y). Do n ot u se  
r ep a ir e d fu ses or sh or t cir cu ited fu seh old er s. F USE : T 5.0A  
CAUTION  
Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this product.  
Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may  
cause personal injury and/or product damage.  
This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and  
Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and IEC 664 respectively. For indoor  
use only.  
This product has autoranging line voltage input, be sure the supply  
voltage is within the specified range.  
Ventilation Requirements: When installing the product in a cabinet,  
the convection into and out of the product must not be restricted. The  
ambient temperature (outside the cabinet) must be less than the  
maximum operating temperature of the product by 4° C for every 100  
watts dissipated in the cabinet. If the total power dissipated in the  
cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then forced convection must be used.  
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect instrument from mains (line)  
before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to  
clean the external case parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.  
Product Markings  
CE - the CE mark is a registered trademark of the European  
Community. A CE mark accompanied by a year indicated the year the  
design was proven.  
CSA - the CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian  
Standards Association.  
15  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CERTIFICATION  
WARRANTY  
Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that this product met its published  
specifications at the time of shipment from the factory.  
Hewlett-Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements  
are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and  
Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institutes calibration facility,  
and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards  
Organization members.  
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects  
in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of  
shipment. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company will  
at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be  
defective.  
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a  
service facility designated by HP. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges  
to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products  
returned to HP from another country.  
HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use  
with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when  
properly installed on that instrument. HP does not warrant that the  
operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will be  
uninterrupted or error free.  
LIMITATION OF  
WARRANTY  
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from  
improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied  
software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation  
outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper  
site preparation or maintenance.  
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP  
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE.  
EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDIES  
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYERS SOLE AND  
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASE ON CONTRACT,  
TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.  
ASSISTANCE  
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance  
agreements are available for Hewlett-Packard products. For any  
assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service  
Office.  
16  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ta b le 1  
R egion a l Sa les a n d Ser vice Offices  
Eastern USA  
Sales Office  
Eastern USA  
Sales Office  
Midwestern USA  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
2101 Gather Rd.  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
2101 Gather Rd.  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
5201 Tollview Drive  
Rolling Meadows, IL 60008  
Tel: (708) 342-2000  
Rockville, MD 20850  
Tel: (301) 258-2000  
Rockville, MD 20850  
Tel: (301) 258-2000  
Southern USA  
Southern USA  
Western USA  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
1995 North Park Place  
Atlanta, GA 30339  
Sales  
Service Center  
Service Center  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
930 E. Campbell Road  
Richardson, TX 75081  
Tel: (214) 699-4331  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
301 E. Evelyn Avenue  
Mountain View, CA 94041  
Tel: (415) 694-2000  
Fax: (415) 694-0601  
Tel: (404) 955-1500  
Fax: (404) 980-7292  
Service  
Tel: (404) 850-2544  
Fax: (404) 980-7292  
Western USA  
Western USA  
United States of America  
Customer Information Center  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
Tel: (800) 752-0900  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
24 Inverness Place East  
Englewood, CO 80112  
Sales  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
1421 South Manhattan Avenue  
Fullerton, CA 92631  
Sales  
6:00 am to 5:00 pm Pacific Time  
Parts Direct: 1-800-227-8164  
Tel: (303) 649-5000  
Fax: (303) 649-5787  
Service  
Tel: (714) 999-6700  
Fax: (714) 778-3033  
Service  
Tel: (303) 649-5512  
Fax: (303) 649-5787  
Tel: (714) 758-5490  
Fax: (714) 778-3033  
South Eastern Europe  
Sales and Service  
European Multicountry Region  
Sales and Service  
Northern Europe  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Ges. m.b.h.  
Liebigasse 1  
Hewlett-Packard S.A.  
P.O. Box 95  
Hewlett-Packard Nederland B.V.  
Startbaan 16  
P.O. Box 72  
150, Route dv Nant_dl_AVRIL  
CH-1217 Meyrin 2  
1187 XR  
A-1222 Vienna, Austria  
Telephone: 43 222 2500 0  
Telex: 13 4425  
Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
P.O. Box 667  
Geneva, Switzerland  
Telephone: (41/22) 780-8111  
Fax: (41/22) 780-8542  
Telephone: 31/20 5476911 X 6631  
Fax: 31-20-6471825NL  
17  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Asia  
J apan  
International Sales Branch  
Headquarters  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Asia Ltd.  
22-30/F Peregrine Tower  
Lippo Center  
Sales and Service  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard S.A.  
39 Rue Veyrot  
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.  
3-29-21, Takaido-Higashi  
Suginami-Ku, Tokyo 168  
Telephone: 81 3 3331-6111  
Fax: 81 3 3331-6631  
P.O. Box 365  
89 Queensway, Central  
Hong Kong  
1217 Meyrin 1  
Geneva, Switzerland  
Telephone: 41-22-780-4111  
Fax: 41-22-780-4770  
G.P.O. Box 863 Hong Kong  
Telephone: 852-848-7777  
Fax: 852-868-4997  
Australia, New Zealand  
Sales and Service  
Canada  
Canada  
Sales and Service  
Service Center  
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.  
P.O. Box 221  
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.  
5150 Spectrum Way  
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5G1  
Canada  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
17500 Transcanada Highway  
S. Serv Road  
31-41 J oseph Street  
Blackburn, Victoria 3130  
Telephone: (61/3) 895-2895  
Fax: (61/3) 898-9257  
Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8  
Canada  
Telephone: (416) 206-4725  
Fax: (416) 206-4739  
Telephone: (416) 206-3295  
Canada  
Latin America  
United Kingdom  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.  
Cain Road  
Service Center  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
LAHQ Mexico City  
Col. Lomas de Virreyes  
11000 Mexico D.F.  
Mexico  
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.  
11120 178 Street  
Edmonton, Alberta T5S 1P2  
Canada  
Amen Corner  
Bracknell, Berkshire  
RG12 1HN  
Telephone: (403) 486-6666  
Fax: (403) 489-8764  
Telephone: (52/5) 326-4000  
Fax: (52/5) 202 7718  
United Kingdom  
Telephone: 44 344 360000  
18  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P r od u ct Descr ip t ion  
The HP 8935 CDMA Cellular/PCS Base Station Test Set offers full  
signal generation and analysis capability and support for cellular  
frequency bands and international PCS frequency bands.  
You can perform the following CDMA measurements using the  
Test Set:  
Signal Quality Measurements  
Rho (ρ)  
Time Offset  
Frequency Error  
Carrier Feedthrough  
Code Domain Measurements  
Code Domain Power  
Code Domain Timing  
Code Domain Phase  
Average Power  
Channel Power  
Error Vector Magnitude  
The Test Sets CDMA generator also has the following capabilities:  
Reverse Channel Source with Data Buffer  
AWGN (built-in calibrated Eb/No levels)  
The Test Set also supports CDMA reference clocks and triggers.  
In addition to its CDMA measurements and capabilities, the Test Set  
also provides the following analog measurements:  
AC Level  
AM Depth  
AF Frequency  
DC Level  
Distortion  
Frequency and Frequency Error  
Transmitter Power  
FM Deviation  
Audio Frequency  
SINAD  
SNR  
19  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Th is Book  
Chapter 1, Getting Started,” on page 23 familiarizes you with the  
front panel controls. It introduces the different types of control fields  
that are used to make measurements  
Chapter 2, Operating Overview,” on page 33 provides general  
information about how to change measurement screens and change  
control field settings. This chapter also provides some utility  
procedures: calibrating channel power, setting a reference, setting  
measurement limits, setting a generator/analyzer offset, averaging  
measurements, saving and recalling setups, and using USER keys.  
Chapter 3, Overview of the Test Sets Built-In Tools,” on page 55  
introduces the RFTOOLS program. This program automates some  
measurements: cable fault location, swept return loss, swept and  
discrete insertion loss, spectrum analyzer self-calibration. The  
program also includes utilities for printing and data collection.  
Basic operation of the built-in signal strength meter, spectrum  
analyzer, oscilloscope, and code domain analyzer is also included in  
this chapter.  
Chapter 4, CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields,” on  
page 81 explains the measurements that can be made from these  
screens and the fields that control the measurements parameters.  
CDMA measurements include average power measurements,  
channel power measurements, rho measurements (including  
frequency error, time offset, and carrier feedthrough), EVM  
measurements (including phase error and magnitude error), and  
code domain measurements (including timing, phase, and power).  
Chapter 5, Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields,” on  
page 115 explains the measurements that can be made from these  
screens and the fields that control the measurements parameters.  
Analog measurements include ac/dc level, AM depth, AF frequency,  
distortion, frequency and frequency error, transmitter power, FM  
deviation, SINAD, and SNR.  
Chapter 6, Configuration - Screens and Control Fields,” on page  
159 explains the configuration controls for the Test Set.  
Chapter 7, Connectors,” on page 183 describes the function and  
physical attributes of each connector on the Test Set.  
Chapter 8, Accessories, Manuals, Support,” on page 195 describes  
any available upgrades, accessories, training and support for the  
Test Set.  
Chapter 9, Error Messages,” on page 203 provides any available  
information about error recovery when messages are displayed.  
20  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Con ven t ion s Used in t h is Book  
Screen names are shown as follows: CODE DOM.  
Keys are shown in the following typeface: CDMA Gen. Shifted functions  
(labeled in blue above the keys) are accessed by pressing and releasing  
the blue Shift key, and then the key below the blue label.  
Fields and messages displayed on the CRT are shown in the following  
typeface: Input Atten.  
The term Test Set” is used to refer to the HP 8935.  
The screens shown in this manual may not exactly match the screens  
displayed on the Test Sets CRT. Some differences may be due to control  
field settings, while other differences may be due to instrument  
revisions.  
Which Document is The following documents are part of the HP 8935 document set. Use the  
Required?  
table to help you decide which document you need.  
Ta b le 2  
Docu m en t Na viga t ion  
Docu m en t  
P a r t Nu m b er  
Usa ge  
CDMA Application Guide  
AMPS Application Guide  
Reference Guide  
E6380-90016  
Use this manual for basic CDMA measurements and  
for getting started with the Test Set.  
E6380-90017  
E6380-90019  
E6380-90018  
E6380-90015  
Use this manual for making AMPS base station  
measurements.  
Use this manual for screen and field descriptions and  
general operation information about the Test Set.  
Programmers Guide  
Use this manual to learn HP-IB syntax and for learning  
how to program the Test Set.  
Assembly Level Repair  
Guide  
Use this manual to perform calibration on the Test Set  
and for general service information.  
21  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Get tin g Sta r t ed  
23  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Before Connecting a Radio  
Befor e Con n ectin g a R a d io  
NOTE  
The RF IN/OUT port should be used for all transmitter  
tests when the radio is connected directly to the Test Set.  
(All UUT transmitter power measurements are made  
through this port). Off-the-air measurements can be made  
using the ANT IN port.  
CAUTION Overpower Damage— Refer to the Test Sets side panel  
for maximum input power level at the RF IN/OUT,  
DUPLEX OUT, and ANT IN connectors. Exceeding these  
levels can cause permanent instrument damage.  
24  
Chapter1  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Changing the Test Set’s Display  
Ch a n gin g t h e Test Set s Disp la y  
Ch a n gin g t h e Mea su r em en t Scr een  
The measurement screen is changed using the titlebar at the top of the  
screen and the cursor-control knob, using the  
GENERATOR/ANALYZER keys, or by using the UTILS keys. Rotate  
the knob to move the cursor from field to field or to change settings.  
Press the knob to make selections (see Changing the Control Fields” on  
page 26 for more information about fields).  
F igu r e 1-1 Usin g t h e cu r sor -con t r ol Kn ob or Scr een Keys  
Push the knob to  
make a selection.  
Rotate the knob  
to move the  
Press one of the  
GENERATOR/ANALYZER or  
UTILS keys for a shortcut to  
the measurement or  
cursor, or change  
settings.  
configuration screens.  
Titlebar  
USER  
k1’  
SOFTWARE  
GENERATOR/ ANALYZER  
STATE  
Menu  
CDMA  
Gen  
CDMA  
Anl  
Code  
Dom  
k1  
Preset  
Meas  
Reset  
k2’  
k2  
Reset  
AF Anl  
Scope  
Pause/  
RF  
Gen  
RF  
Anl  
Spec  
Anl  
Hold  
Continue  
k3’  
k3  
Save  
DATA ENTRY  
Recall  
Ref Set  
Meter  
Avg  
Incr  
Incr  
10  
Incr  
Set  
Enter  
x
10  
7
8
9
6
k4’  
k4  
ADRS  
Local  
dB  
E
F
Lo Limit  
Hi limit  
GHz  
dBm  
Release  
k5  
4
5
UTILS  
PuSelect  
B
C
D
%
Prev  
MHz  
V
Shift  
1
2
3
Printer  
Config  
Print  
A
EEX  
s
Out of Lock  
kHz  
mV  
0
.
+/-  
I/O  
Config  
Inst  
Config  
Yes  
No  
ms  
mW  
Error  
Message  
On/Off  
ppm  
W
%D  
dB  
Hz  
V
V
Cancel  
Help  
Volume  
Squelch  
To change the measurement screen  
St ep 1. Select the titlebar at the top of the screen (placement of the  
titlebar may vary slightly on some screens).  
St ep 2. Select the measurement screen from the list of choices.  
OR  
St ep 1. Press a screen key: CDMA Gen, CDMA Anl, Code Dom, RF Gen, RF Anl,  
Spec Anl, AF Anl, Scope, Prev, Inst Config, Help, Printer Config, I/O Config,  
Error Message.  
AF Anl, Scope, Printer Config, I/O Config, and Error Message  
are shifted functions (labeled in blue above a key). You must  
press and release the blue Shift key then the key below the blue  
label to access the screen (or other function) labeled in blue.  
Pressing the Prev key displays the previous screen.  
Chapter 1  
25  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Changing the Test Set’s Display  
Ch a n gin g th e Con t r ol F ield s  
There are several types of control fields in the Test Set. This section  
describes some of the different types of fields.  
Un it-of-Mea su r e F ield  
Unit-of-measure can be changed to display measurements in different  
values or magnitudes. The unit-of-measure field can also be used to  
turn a measurement on or off (use the On/Off Yes key).  
F igu r e 1-2 Un it -of-Mea su r e F ield  
Unit-of-Measure  
To change a unit-of-measure field  
Step 1. Position the cursor at the unit field on the display.  
Step 2. Press a key labeled with a different unit-of-measure  
(such as W).  
If the new units are valid, the measurement value is displayed  
in the unit.  
If the new units are not valid, the message Invalid  
keystroke.is displayed and the units are not changed.  
26  
Chapter1  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Changing the Test Set’s Display  
Un d er lin ed E n t r y F ield  
Underlined entry fields provide a choice of two settings (toggle).  
F igu r e 1-3 Un d e r lin ed E n t r y F ie ld  
Underlined  
Entry Field  
To Change an underlined entry  
St ep 1. Position the cursor at the field.  
St ep 2. Push the cursor-control knob or the Enter key to move the  
underline under the desired choice.  
The underlined setting is immediately activated when  
selected.  
Chapter 1  
27  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Changing the Test Set’s Display  
On e-of-Ma n y F ield  
One-of-many fields display a list of choices when selected.  
F igu r e 1-4 On e -of-Ma n y F ield  
One-of-Many  
Field  
Choices:  
Chan Pwr  
Rho  
EVM  
Avg Pwr  
To make a one-of-many choice  
Step 1. Position the cursor at the field.  
Step 2. Push the cursor-control knob or the Enter key to display the  
choices.  
Step 3. Move the cursor through the choices by turning the knob.  
Step 4. Push the cursor-control knob or the Enter key to make the  
choice.  
The choice is immediately activated when selected.  
28  
Chapter1  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Changing the Test Set’s Display  
Nu m er ic-E n tr y F ield s  
Values for numeric entry fields can be entered and changed using  
various methods, depending on your testing needs.  
F igu r e 1-5 Nu m er ic-E n tr y F ield  
Numeric Entry Field  
To change a value  
St ep 1. Position the cursor at the field.  
St ep 2. Key in the desired number using the DATA ENTRY keys.  
St ep 3. Press Enter to select the choice.  
OR  
St ep 1. Position the cursor at the field.  
St ep 2. Push the cursor-control knob (the flashing >> cursor appears).  
St ep 3. Turn the knob to increment or decrement the value. (The  
current increment value may not be appropriate for your  
operation. See See Changing the Increment or Decrement  
Setting” on page 42.)  
St ep 4. Push the cursor-control knob or the Enter key to select the  
choice.  
OR  
St ep 1. Position the cursor at the field.  
St ep 2. Push the cursor-control knob to highlight the desired choice.  
St ep 3. Use the up-arrow or down-arrow keys to increment or  
decrement the value.  
Chapter 1  
29  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Changing the Test Set’s Display  
Decim a l Va lu es  
Decimal values are used for most numeric entry fields. The acceptable  
entries for decimal values are 0 through 9, , +/-, and EEX.  
The +/- key is used for entering negative numbers.  
The EEX key is used to enter values in exponential notation. For  
example to enter 10-9 you would enter 1, 0, EEX (Shift, +/-), +/-, 9.  
Hexa d ecim a l Va lu es  
Hexadecimal (Hex) values are used for entering some signaling  
parameters. The acceptable entries values are 0 through 9 and A  
through F. No unit-of-measure is associated with these values.  
Hexadecimal values are either entered from the keypad (A through F  
are shifted functions) or for some fields, values are selected from a list  
of choices.  
30  
Chapter1  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly?  
H ow d o I Ver ify th a t t h e Test Set is Op er a t in g  
P r op er ly?  
If your Test Set powers-up and displays the CDMA ANALYZER screen,  
but you suspect an instrument problem, use the Instrument Quick  
Check to verify operation of the basic instrument functions.  
If no failure is indicated by this test, but you still suspect a problem,  
refer to the Performance Tests” information in the Assembly Level  
Repair Manual.  
In st r u m en t Qu ick Ch eck  
St ep 1. Set up the quick check:  
a . Remove any connected cables (except for AC or DC power).  
b . Turn instrument power on (if it is not already on).  
c. Press Preset.  
d . Press Inst Config and set the RF Displayfield to Freq.  
e. Press CDMA Anl and select the Avg Pwrfield, then select Rho  
from the Choices: menu.  
f. Set the Tune Freqfield to 800 MHz.  
g. Set the Anl Dirfield to Rev.  
h . Press CDMA Gen and set the Output Portfield to RF Out.  
i. Set the RF Gen Freqfield to 800 MHz.  
j. Set the Amplitudefield to 40 dBm  
k . Set the Gen Dir. field to Fwd. (The EQ In/Outfield is  
displayed.)  
St ep 2. Check the following reading:  
a . Rho should be greater than 0.96.  
St ep 3. Press Spec Anl to access the SPEC ANL screen.  
You should see the characteristic CDMA spectrum.  
Chapter 1  
31  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly?  
F igu r e 1-6 CDMA Sp ectr u m  
32  
Chapter1  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Overview  
Displaying CDMA Measurements  
Disp la yin g CDMA Mea su r em en ts  
Ch a n n el P ow er , Rh o, EVM, Aver a ge P ow er  
You can select channel power, rho, EVM, or average power on the  
CDMA ANALYZER or CDMA GENERATOR screen as shown in  
For more information about these measurements see "CDMA  
Measurements" on page 82.  
F igu r e 2-1 Disp la yin g Ch a n n el P ow e r , R h o, E VM, or Aver a ge  
P ow er  
Choices:  
Chan Pwr  
Rho  
EVM  
Avg Pwr  
Tim e Offset, F r equ en cy E r r or , Ca r r ier F eed th r ou gh  
When you select Rho, the Time Offset, Frequency Error, and  
Carrier Feedthrumeasurements are displayed. Time offset and  
carrier feedthrough are also displayed on the CODE DOM screen along  
with frequency offset.  
F r eq u en cy Offset  
Frequency offset is displayed on the CODE DOM screen.  
Ma gn itu d e Er r or , P h a se Er r or  
When you select EVM, the Magnitude Errorand Phase Error  
measurements are displayed.  
34  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating Overview  
Displaying CDMA Measurements  
Cod e Dom a in Mea su r em en t s (P ow er , Tim in g, P h a se)  
Code domain measurements are displayed on the CODE DOM screen.  
To select a code domain measurement, go to the CODE DOM screen  
and select a measurement from the Measurementfield in the Main  
controls menu.  
For more information about code domain measurements see "Code  
Domain Measurements" on page 89.  
F igu r e 2-2 Selectin g Cod e Dom a in Mea su r em en ts  
Choices:  
Power  
Fast Pwr  
Timing  
Phase  
Chapter 2  
35  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Overview  
Displaying Analog Measurements  
Disp la yin g An a log Mea su r em en ts  
RF Mea su r em en t s  
F r eq u en cy Er r or , F r equ en cy  
RF Frequency Error and RF Frequency are displayed on the RF  
ANALYZER, RF GENERATOR, and AF ANALYZER screens.  
F igu r e 2-3 Disp la yin g R F F r eq u e n cy E r r or or R F F r e qu en cy,  
a n d TX P ow er  
Choices:  
Freq Error  
Frequency  
TX  
Power  
Tr a n sm itt er (TX)P ow er  
TX Poweris only measured and displayed here when the Input Port  
on the RF ANALYZER screen is set to RF In. If Ant(antenna) is  
selected, the measurement is replaced by four dashes (- - - -).  
You can measure low power levels on the ANT IN port using the  
spectrum analyzer.  
Refer to the "TX Power Measurement" field on page 120 and the "TX  
Pwr Zero" field on page 157 for more information on measuring  
transmitter power.  
CAUTION  
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN (antenna)  
port can cause instrument damage (although internal  
protection circuits can typically withstand a  
short-duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts). If the overpower  
circuit is triggered, remove the signal from the ANT IN  
port and turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.  
36  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Displaying Analog Measurements  
Disp la yin g AF Mea su r em en t s  
F M Devia tion , AM Dep th , AC Level  
The AF Anl Insetting determines the AF analyzers input and the  
measurement displayed in the top-right corner of the measurement  
area (see figure 2-4). These measurements are displayed on the RF  
GENERATOR, RF ANALYZER, and AF ANALYZER screens.  
Table 2-1 lists the measurement displayed for each AF Anl Insetting.  
F igu r e 2-4 Disp la yin g F M Devia tion , AM De p t h , or AC Leve l  
Choices:  
FM Demod  
AM Demod  
SSB Demod  
Audio In  
Ext Mod  
FM Mod  
AM Mod  
Ta b le 2-1 Mea su r em en t s Select ed w it h th e AF An l In field  
Mea su r em en t  
AF An l In Sett in g  
FM Demod, FM Mod  
FM Deviation  
AM Depth  
AC Level  
AM Demod, AM Mod  
SSB Demod, Audio In, Ext Mod, Audio Out  
Chapter 2  
37  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating Overview  
Displaying Analog Measurements  
SINAD, Dist or tion , SNR , AF F r equ en cy, DC Level,  
These measurements are available on the RF GENERATOR,  
RF ANALYZER, and AF ANALYZER screens. See figure 2-5.  
F igu r e 2-5 Disp la yin g SINAD, Distor tion , SNR , DC Level, or  
AF F r eq u e n cy  
Choices:  
SINAD  
Distn  
SNR  
AF Freq  
DC Level  
The Distortion measurement is only for a 1 kHz tone.  
Selecting SNR (Signal/Noise Ratio) turns off any other audio  
measurement. For more information on making this measurement, see  
the RF Gen Freq field description, on page 148.  
38  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Displaying Analog Measurements  
Disp la yin g An a log Mea su r em en t R esu lts on a Met er Sca le  
F igu r e 2-6 Disp la yin g th e Mete r Sca le  
Unit-of -Measure  
Fields  
Meters:  
On/Off  
Lo End  
Hi End  
Intervals  
Measurement results can be displayed on a meter scale. The digital  
numeric value is still displayed (but smaller) under the meter scale.  
To display the meter scale  
St ep 1. Move the cursor to the unit-of-measure field for the  
measurement you want displayed on the meter.  
St ep 2. Press and release the blue Shift key, then the Incr Set key to  
access the meter function.  
St ep 3. Select On/Offfrom the Meters: menu (or press the On/Off key).  
To set the meter’s end points and scale intervals  
St ep 1. Use the knob to select the unit-of-measure field for the  
measurement you want displayed on the meter.  
St ep 2. Press and release the blue Shift key, then the Incr Set key to  
access the meter function.  
St ep 3. Select Hi End, Lo End, or Intervalfrom the Meters:menu  
and enter the value for your selection, then press the Enter key.  
St ep 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set the desired  
parameters for the meters scale.  
Chapter 2  
39  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Overview  
Using Channel Numbers to Set Analyzer and Generator Frequencies  
Usin g Ch a n n el Nu m b er s to Set An a lyzer a n d Gen er a t or  
F r eq u en cies  
RF analyzer and RF generator frequencies can be entered by channel  
number (the default setting) or by discrete frequencies (in MHz). The  
RF Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen controls  
which way frequencies are entered. This screen is accessed by pressing  
the Inst Config key.  
If the RF Displayfield is set to Chanfor channel tuning, you also need  
to set the RF Chan Stdfield to indicate the standard for your base  
station (such as North American PCS). This automatically sets the  
correct frequency offset needed to generate reverse channel signals and  
analyze forward channel signals for base stations.  
If you do not know the channel number of your base station, but know  
the transmit and receive frequencies, set the RF Displayfield to Freq.  
You can then enter these frequencies directly for the RF generator and  
RF analyzer during tests.  
F igu r e 2-7 Con figu r a t ion to Use Ch a n n el Nu m ber s for R F  
Gen er a tor a n d An a lyzer Set tin gs  
Set the R F Disp la y field to Ch a n  
to turn on channel tuning.  
Select the R F Ch a n Std field to  
display a list of system types.....  
..and then select the channel standard  
for testing your base stations.  
40  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Calibrating the Channel Power Measurement  
Ca lib r a t in g t h e Ch a n n el P ow er Mea su r em en t  
To calibrate a channel power measurement at the RF IN/OUT port  
using the internal CDMA generator  
St ep 1. Go to the CDMA ANALYZER screen and choose the Chan Pwr  
measurement.  
St ep 2. Set the Tune Freqfield (or RF Channelfield) to the center  
frequency of your CDMA signal.  
St ep 3. Select the Chn Pwr Calfield and wait until the calibration is  
complete.  
Chapter 2  
41  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Changing the Increment or Decrement Setting  
Ch a n gin g th e In cr em en t or Decr em en t Sett in g  
Sp ecifyin g An In cr em en t Va lu e for t h e Ar r ow Keys or Kn ob  
The Incr Set key is used to assign a specific increment value. The  
increment value may use different units than the field you are  
incrementing/decrementing. For instance; if the RF generators  
Amplitudesetting is displayed in dBµV, you could increment in units  
of dB or mV.  
To change the increment/decrement value  
Step 1. Move the cursor to the numeric entry field to be changed.  
Step 2. Press Incr Set, and enter the desired incremental value and  
unit-of-measure using the DATA ENTRY keys.  
Step 3. Use the down-arrow and up-arrow keys  
or cursor  
control knob to increment the fields value. The fields value  
changes by the value you set for each key press or knob click.  
Usin g t h e F a ct or of 10 In cr em en t /Decr em en t Keys  
The Incr × 10 and Incr ÷ 10 keys change the increment/decrement value by a  
factor of 10.  
For example, if you set the increment for Tune Freqto 10 MHz for  
every click of the knob or push of the down-arrow or up-arrow keys,  
pushing Incr ×10 changes the increment value to 100 MHz.  
42  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Using Measurement Limit Indicators  
Usin g Mea su r em en t Lim it In d ica t or s  
The Lo Limit and Hi Limit functions are used to define a measurement  
window.” You can set a high limit, a low limit, or both. When limits are  
assigned, Lo, Hior both are indicated on the screen.  
A measurement that goes above or below the defined limits causes  
three things to happen:  
1. A message appears at the top of the screen indicating a limit was  
exceeded.  
2. The Loor Hiindicator flashes.  
3. The beeper beeps (if it is has been enabled in the INSTRUMENT  
CONFIGURE screen).  
Limits are helpful when you cant watch the Test Sets display while  
you are making an adjustment on the equipment you are testing or  
repairing. They are also a convenient way of alerting you to long-term  
measurement drift.  
To set high and low limits  
St ep 1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the  
measurement for which you are setting limits.  
St ep 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the down-arrow key to  
access the Lo Limit function, and enter the measurements  
low-limit value and its unit-of-measure.1  
St ep 3. Press and release the Shift key, then the up-arrow key to access  
the Hi Limit function, and enter the measurements high-limit  
value and its unit-of-measure.2  
1. The fundamental unit for the limits does not have to be the same as the mea-  
surements units. For instance; when measuring AC Level in Volts, you can set  
high and low limits in units of dBm.  
Chapter 2  
43  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating Overview  
Using Measurement Limit Indicators  
To reset or remove limits  
To reset a limit that has been exceeded  
Step 1. Position the cursor in front of the measurements  
unit-of-measure.  
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the down-arrow (or  
up-arrow key) to access the Lo Limit (or Hi Limit) function.  
Step 3. Press Enter or Shift then Hold to access the Meas Reset function.  
To remove a limit  
Step 1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the  
assigned limit.  
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the down-arrow (or  
up-arrow key) to access the Lo Limit (or Hi Limit) function, then  
press the On/Off key.  
44  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Overview  
Setting A Measurement Reference  
Sett in g A Mea su r em en t R efer en ce  
The reference set (Ref Set) function establishes a measurement  
reference point. This allows you to make a direct comparison between  
two measurement results, or between a measurement standard and the  
actual measurement results.  
Depending on the type of measurement, referenced measurements are  
displayed in one of two ways:  
1. Displa yed value = Measurement Reference. The difference between  
the measured value and the reference value is displayed.  
or  
2. Displa yed va lue = Measurement ÷ Reference. A ratio of the measured  
value to the reference value is displayed. This ratio is expressed in  
dB.  
To set a reference  
St ep 1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the  
measurement you want to set the reference for.  
St ep 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the Incr ÷10 key to access  
the Ref Set function.  
St ep 3. Enter a reference value, then press Enter. (To use the currently  
measured value as a reference, just press Enter.)  
St ep 4. The Reference indicator shows that an internal reference has  
been set.  
St ep 5. To turn the reference off press and release the Shift key, then  
the Incr ÷10 key to access the Ref Set function, and then press the  
On/Off key.  
Chapter 2  
45  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Averaging Measurements  
Aver a gin g Mea su r em en ts  
The Avg (average) function allows you to display the average value of a  
number of measurements. You enter the number of measurement  
samples used to calculate and display the measurement average. This  
dampens the effects of rapidly changing measurements, providing a  
more usable measurement display.  
To use measurement averaging  
Step 1. Position the cursor in front of the measurements  
unit-of-measure.  
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the Incr ×10 key to access  
the Avg function.  
Step 3. Enter the desired number of measurement samples to be used  
for calculating the average, then press the knob or the Enter  
key.  
or  
Press On/Off to use the currently-displayed number of samples.  
Step 4. To turn averaging off, position the cursor in front of the  
unit-of-measure and press and release the Shift key, then the  
Incr ×10 key to access the Avg function, then press the On/Off key.  
How t h e Test Set Aver a ges Mea su r em en t s  
When the averaging function is first enabled, a numeric average is  
calculated and displayed each time a measurement is made. This  
continues until the specified number of samples is reached. From that  
point on, the averaging function performs an exponential filtering  
operation that mimics an RC filter.  
Because of the exponential response, any large measurement changes  
result in a displayed value that ramps up or down to the actual  
measured value.  
A measurement reset clears the measurement history for all  
measurements and starts the averaging process over. (Press and  
release the Shift key then the Hold key (Meas Reset) to reset the  
measurement.)  
46  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset  
Sett in g a n R F Gen er a tor /An a lyzer Offset  
You can set a fixed frequency offset between the RF generator and the  
RF analyzer. This feature is convenient for testing radios with a fixed  
transmit/receive frequency offset.  
To set an RF Offset  
St ep 1. Go to the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.  
St ep 2. Set the RF Displayfield to Freq.  
St ep 3. Set the RF Offsetfield to On.  
St ep 4. Select the (Gen)-(Anl)field and enter the frequency offset  
value.  
St ep 5. Go to the RF GENERATOR screen.  
St ep 6. Select the RF Gen Freqfield, and rotate the cursor control  
knob to vary the RF generators frequency.  
St ep 7. Go to the RF ANALYZER screen. Notice that the Tune Freq  
value changes to maintain the offset between the generator  
and the analyzer. (You can use the Prev key to switch between  
the generator and analyzer screens.)  
Chapter 2  
47  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups  
Sa vin g a n d R eca llin g In str u m en t Setu p s  
The save and recall functions allow you to store different instrument  
setups and retrieve them later, eliminating the task of re-configuring  
the Test Set.  
The number of available save registers depends on how many changes  
were made to the ba se instrument setup for each save. (See "BASE  
Settings" on page 50.) The smaller the number of changes, the greater  
the number of save registers that can be used (typically over 200).  
Save/Recall register settings can be saved to internal RAM or to a PC  
card. Saving registers to a PC card allows you to back up” the settings  
in case you need to clear them from memory for running large  
programs, or when a firmware upgrade is performed (see "Memory  
To save an instrument setup  
Step 1. Go to the I/O CONFIGURE screen.  
Step 2. Select the storage media using the Save/Recallfield. (The  
default is internal memory.)  
Step 3. Make any changes to the instrument that you want to save in  
a register.  
Step 4. Press and release the Shift key then the Recall key to access the  
Save function.  
Step 5. Use the DATA ENTRY keys or the Save:menu to enter the  
registers name.  
To recall an instrument setup  
Step 1. Select the I/O CONFIGURE screen.  
Step 2. Select the media to recall settings from using the  
Save/Recallfield. The default is internal memory.  
Step 3. Press Recall.  
Step 4. Use the knob to select the desired setup to be recalled from the  
Recallmenu.  
48  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups  
To remove (clear) an individual save register  
St ep 1. Specify where the register is stored using the Save/Recall  
field on the I/O CONFIGURE screen.  
St ep 2. Press Recall.  
St ep 3. Use the knob to position the cursor in front of the register to  
be removed from the Recallmenu at the bottom-right of the  
screen. The register name and percentage of memory occupied  
by that register are indicated at the top of the screen.  
St ep 4. Press Yes On/Off. A prompt appears, asking if you want to delete  
the save register.  
St ep 5. Press Yes On/Off.  
To clear all save registers  
St ep 1. Press Recall.  
St ep 2. Use the knob to position the cursor in front of the *Clr All*  
entry in the Recallmenu at the bottom-right of the screen.  
St ep 3. Press the knob or press Enter. A prompt appears at the top of  
the screen to verify that you want to clear all registers.  
St ep 4. Press Yes On/Off.  
R egister Na m es  
You can use any number, letter, or combination of numbers and letters  
as a name for storing instrument settings. For instance; if you want to  
save a setup for testing a Vulcan7” radio, you can save the setting as  
“VULCAN7.  
Two register names are reserved for special purposes: POWERON and  
BASE.  
P OWERON Settin gs  
When the Test Set is turned on, it uses a set of instrument setup  
parameters specified at the time of manufacture. You can have the  
instrument power up in a different state by making the desired changes  
to the original settings, and then saving them using the name  
POWERON.  
The next time the instrument is turned on, the instrument returns to  
the state present when you saved the POWERON setting. For instance;  
if the SCOPE screen was displayed when POWERON was saved, it is  
the screen that is displayed when you turn the instrument on.  
Chapter 2  
49  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Overview  
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups  
BASE Settin gs  
The BASE register contains any field settings the user has saved that  
are different from the instrument preset state. It establishes a  
reference point for all future saves. If a base is not saved, the preset  
state is used as the reference.  
When you save an instrument setup, the new setup is compared to the  
base settings, and any differences are stored under the register name  
you supply. Because only differences are stored, a much larger number  
of instrument setups can be saved than if the contents of every field was  
saved.  
When you recall an instrument setting, every field is reset to the base  
settings. The saved settings are then used to re-establish the desired  
instrument setup.  
You can define your own base setting. If your desired settings are very  
different from the preset values, you may want to change the BASE  
register. This will decrease the amount of memory used to save each  
setup, and allow you to save many more setups.  
CAUTION  
Since each save/recall register only contains the  
differences between the setup being saved and the present  
base register settings, changing the base settings causes  
all other saved setups to be erased from memory  
(including the POWERON setting if one has been saved).  
Unless you consistently change the same fields to the  
same value each time you use the instrument, you should  
avoid creating your own BASE settings.  
Mem or y Con sid er a t ion s  
When the Save/Recallfield of the I/O CONFIGURE screen is set to  
Internal, programs are saved to the same non-volatile RAM used to  
create RAM disk(s) and run IBASIC programs. By saving a large  
number of instrument setups, you reduce the amount of RAM available  
to run programs. If you get a “memory overflow” message while trying  
to load a program, you must clear one or more save/recall registers to  
free RAM space.  
In st r u m en t H a r d w a r e Ch a n ges  
Recalling a saved register that uses a hardware option that has been  
removed results in unspecified operation. Re-install the needed option  
before attempting to recall the associated register(s).  
50  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating Overview  
Using USER Keys  
Usin g USER Keys  
You can use user keys to move quickly between fields on the same  
screen, and to access fields that are not normally available on the  
screen you are using.  
Local user keys are used to move between settings on the screen that is  
displayed. Five local user keys are available for each screen: k1, k2, k3, k4,  
and k5. When the user key is pressed, the cursor instantly moves to, and  
selects, the assigned field; eliminating the need to turn and push the  
knob. Using these keys removes any other local user keys you may have  
set up.  
Globa l user keys are used to access settings that are not available on  
the current screen. Three global user keys are available: k1’, k2’, and k3’.  
(Use the Shift key to access the global user keys)  
Usin g P r e-Defin ed USER Keys  
To Use the Pre-Assigned Local USER Keys  
St ep 1. Press and release the Shift key, the k4 key; then the Enter key.  
The numbers 1 through 5 appear in front of various fields.  
(See figure 2-8.)  
St ep 2. Press the USER keys (k1 to k5) and notice how the cursor  
immediately moves to the corresponding field.  
St ep 3. To stop using the default user keys, press and release the Shift  
key, then the k5 key to access the Release function; then press  
the Enter key.  
F igu r e 2-8 An E xa m p le of P r e-Assign ed Loca l User Keys  
USER  
k1’  
k1  
k2’  
k2  
k3’  
k3  
Assign  
k4  
Release  
k5  
Chapter 2  
51  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating Overview  
Using USER Keys  
Assign in g a n d R elea sin g USER Keys  
When defining user keys, the Assign function is used to create key  
definitions; the Release function removes the definitions. Re-assigning a  
user key to a different field automatically releases it from its previous  
setting.  
To assign local user keys  
Step 1. Move the cursor to the field that you want to assign to a local  
user key.  
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the k4 key to access the  
Assign function. Then press a USER key (k1-k5). The user key  
number appears in front of the field you assigned it to. (Since  
the cursor is at the newly assigned field, the USER key  
number is hidden until the cursor is moved.)  
To release local user keys  
Step 1. Display the screen containing the user key assignment to be  
removed.  
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the k5 key to access the  
Release function; then press the USER key (k1-k5).  
To assign global user keys  
Step 1. Move the cursor to the field you want to assign a global USER  
key to.  
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the k4 key to access the  
Assign function. Then press Shift and a USER key (k1’- k3’).  
Unlike a local user key, the user key number does not appear  
at this field; instead, a prompt appears at the top of the screen  
confirming the key assignment.  
To release global user keys  
Step 1. Move the cursor to the field with the global user key assigned  
to it.  
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the k5 key to access the  
Release function. Then press Shift and the user key to be  
released.  
52  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Overview  
Replacing Batteries  
R ep la cin g Ba tter ies  
There are two methods by which the Test Set backs up its RAM. One is  
a set of two AA batteries mounted behind the rear panel of the Test Set.  
You must periodically change these batteries. The second method of  
RAM backup is an internal battery. It is not user serviceable.  
CAUTION  
Failure to take prompt action may result in loss of RAM  
data including IBASIC programs and SAVE / RECALL  
states stored in the RAM.  
NOTE  
Do not use rechargeable batteries.  
To change the AA batteries, use the following procedure:  
1. Turn off power and unplug the Test Set.  
2. Remove the six screws in the rear panel using a TX-15 TORX (R)  
screwdriver.  
3. Remove the rear cover.  
4. Replace the AA batteries.  
5. Replace and reconnect the rear panel. Dispose of used batteries  
properly.  
Chapter 2  
53  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Overview  
Replacing Batteries  
54  
Chapter2  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Usin g R F Tools P r ogr a m  
The RF Tools Program resides in the Test Sets ROM. The following  
tests and utility programs are available in this program.  
See Figure 3-1 on page 57 for instructions on loading the RFTOOLS  
program.  
To run the tests or utilities in the RFTOOLS program:  
1. Choose the test or utility you want to run from the list of choices.  
2. Fill in the parameters that are displayed for each test.  
The following tests and utility programs are available in this program.  
56  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
F igu r e 3-1  
Loa d in g a n d R u n n in g R F Tools  
Position the cursor at Select Procedure  
Location: and select it.  
Press Menu to display the Software Menu  
screen.  
2
1
3
5
Position the cursor at ROM and select it.  
Position the cursor at Select Procedure  
Filename: and select it.  
4
ROM  
Position the cursor at Choices: and  
select RFTOOLS.  
Position the cursor at Run Test and  
select it. The Software is now loading.  
6
Loading Time:  
First time:  
approximately  
three minutes.  
RFTOOLS  
XXXXXX  
YYYYYY  
After first time:  
approximately  
15 seconds.  
Chapter 3  
57  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Sw ep t Ga in  
This test measures the gain of a device by sweeping it over the specified  
frequency range. In the menu for this test, you can enter the frequency  
range over which the device is to be swept, the level into the device from  
the DUPLEX OUT port, and the maximum expected gain.  
This test requires two 6-dB pads (attenuators). The pads are put on the  
Test Sets ANT IN and DUPLEX OUT ports to reduce impedance  
mismatch error at these ports. A reference level is obtained by  
connecting a short calibration cable between the pads on the DUPLEX  
OUT and ANT IN ports. Next, the test device is added between the  
calibration cable and one of the pads, and a measurement is made of the  
additional gain from the reference level. The trace of the device gain  
over the frequency range swept is displayed. The maximum gain is also  
displayed on the screen.  
58  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Discr ete F r eq In ser t ion Loss  
This test measures the loss of a cable or device at a specified frequency.  
This test is the most accurate method for measuring insertion loss. In  
the menu for this test, you can enter the discrete frequency and signal  
level at which the measurement will be made.  
This test requires two 6-dB pads. The pads are put on the ANT IN and  
DUPLEX OUT ports on the Test Set to reduce impedance mismatch  
error at these ports. A reference level is obtained by connecting a short  
calibration cable between the pads on the DUPLEX OUT and ANT IN  
ports. Next, the test cable or device is added between the calibration  
cable and one of the pads, and a measurement is made of the addition  
loss from the reference level. The insertion loss at the specified  
frequency is displayed on the screen.  
NOTE  
The insertion loss at the specified frequency is displayed twice. The  
second display is enlarged for easier reading.  
Sw ep t In ser t ion Loss  
This test measures the loss of a cable or device by sweeping it over the  
specified frequency range. In the menu for this test, you can enter the  
frequency range over which the cable is to be swept.  
This test requires two 6-dB pads. The pads are put on the ANT IN and  
DUPLEX OUT ports on the Test Set to reduce impedance mismatch  
error at these ports. A reference level is obtained by connecting a short  
calibration cable between the pads on the DUPLEX OUT an ANT IN  
ports. Next, the test cable or device is added between the calibration  
cable and one of the pads, and a measurement is made of the addition  
loss from the reference level. The trace of the cable loss over the  
frequency range swept is displayed. The average loss is also displayed  
on the screen.  
Chapter 3  
59  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Sw ep t Ret u r n Loss  
This test radiates a test signal when testing antennas or cables with  
antennas attached to them. Verify that the level and frequency span  
used for the test cannot result in interference to other nearby antennas.  
To minimize interference when running the program, set the power  
level at the DUPLEX OUT port to the minimum value needed for good  
measurement resolution. Set the frequency range carefully.  
This test measures the return loss of a cable or device in the swept  
mode. A SWR bridge and two 6 dB pads are connected to the Test Set.  
The pads are used to reduce impedance mismatch errors between the  
SWR bridge and the DUPLEX OUT and ANT IN ports on the Test Set.  
You will be prompted at the start of the test to enter the start and stop  
frequencies. A reference level is measured first with a short or open on  
the DUT port of the SWR bridge. Then the return loss is measured with  
the cable or antenna-under-test. The trace showing return loss over the  
frequency band selected is displayed on the screen. Measured values for  
best and worst case return loss are printed at the top of the screen.  
VSWR can be calculated from the return loss.  
The following formula can be used to determine the VSWR from the  
return loss:  
VSWR  
RL  
----------  
20  
1 + 10  
VSWR = -----------------------  
RL  
1 10----------  
20  
VSWR is sometimes stated as a ratio. For example: 1.2:1 or one point  
two to one” VSWR. The first number in the ratio is calculated from the  
formula above. The second number in the ratio is always one. Table 3-1  
and Table 3-2 contain some of the values from this calculation.  
Ta b le 3-1  
R etu r n Loss (0 t o 20 d B) t o VSWR  
Return Loss (dB)  
VSWR  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
8.7  
4.4  
3.0  
2.3  
1.92 1.67 1.50 1.38 1.29 1.22  
Ta b le 3-2  
R etu r n Loss (20 t o 40 d B) t o VSWR  
Return Loss (dB)  
VSWR  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
1.22  
1.17  
1.13  
1.11 1.08 1.07 1.05 1.04 1.03 1.03 1.02  
60  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Estim a tin g An ten n a R et u r n Loss  
If you are measuring the return loss of an antenna connected to the end  
of a known good feed line, you can determine the approximate return  
loss of the antenna by subtracting twice the line loss. For example, if  
you measure a return loss of 24 dB and the line is known to have 2 dB  
loss, the estimated return loss of the antenna is 20 dB (since there is a  
total of 4 dB of loss as the signal is sent to the SWR bridge and reflected  
back to the Test Set). This estimate is in error if the coaxial line and  
connectors do not have a return loss somewhat greater than 24 dB.  
Chapter 3  
61  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Ca ble F a u lt  
NOTE  
Test Signal Can Cause Interference  
When testing cables attached to antennas, test signals will be radiated.  
Verify that the signal used for the test cannot result in interference to  
another antenna.  
This test operates over a wide frequency band. The test will always  
operate with a center frequency of 505 MHz. The frequency span  
however will be determined by the length of the cable measured. Longer  
cables will use a narrower frequency span. The frequency span equals  
990 MHz for cables less than 50 feet long and gets narrower as the  
cable length increases. It is always safe to assume that the frequency  
span is less than or equal to 990 MHz.  
This test displays the return loss of a transmission line as a function of  
the distance down the line. A frequency-swept signal from the DUPLEX  
OUT port is applied through a resistive power divider to the  
cable-under-test. Signals reflected from faults in the cable are combined  
with the DUPLEX OUT signal in the power divider and applied to the  
ANT IN port. The changing interference of the forward and reflected  
signals, over the swept frequency band, contains information about the  
distance to one or more faults. The software uses a Fast Fourier  
Transform (FFT) to convert the frequency domain into the distance  
domain. The distance displayed on the Test Sets CRT is the physical  
distance to the fault with correction for the velocity factor of the cable.  
Ca b le F a u lt P er for m a n ce  
Measurements of the cable fault location can typically be made up to  
500 feet on low-loss cables and 300 feet on higher-loss cables.  
Resolution of the fault location is approximately 0.4 feet for cable  
lengths up to 50 feet and then linearly increases to 4 feet for a 500 foot  
cable.  
62  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Select in g Ca b le Typ e  
In the menu for this test, you can enter the following information:  
Cable length  
Cable length units  
Pressing the knob toggles the selection between feet and meters.  
Cable class  
Pressing the knob allows selection of Heliax, RG, and custom  
options.  
The next menu varies depending on the selection for cable class:  
If Customis selected, you can enter the cables velocity of  
propagation constant and attenuation per 100 feet (or meters).  
The propagation velocity must be a value between 0 and 1.  
If RGis selected, you can enter the cable type with the example  
[RG 58/U = 58]. You must enter a value between 0 and 1000.  
If Heliaxis selected, you can enter the cable type. A list of  
choices (foam, air, and flex of varying thickness) is displayed. Use  
the knob to select the desired cable type.  
Press k1 (or select Begin Test) when all the appropriate entries  
have been made.  
Connect the cables as instructed, and press k1 (Proceed).  
Velocity fa ct or s a n d a tt en u a tion . Cables that use polyethylene  
dielectric typically have a propagation velocity of 0.66, cables that use a  
teflon dielectric typically have a propagation velocity of 0.70. If the  
cable attenuation is unknown, enter 0 dB per 100 feet (or meters).  
Entering 0 dB/100 will produce return loss values lower than actual,  
but fault distance can be accurately detected.  
Chapter 3  
63  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Typ ica l ca b le fa u lt r et u r n loss m ea su r em en ts. Return loss is a  
ratio of input power to reflected power. For example, if 100 Watts was  
applied to a cable and 10 Watts was returned, the return loss is 10 dB  
(10 log (100/10)). In the same example, if 1 Watt was returned, the  
return loss is 20 dB (10 log (100/1)). Typical return loss measurements  
for the cable loss test are listed below:  
Open-Circuit Cable = 0 dB  
Short-Circuit Cable = 0 dB  
50-Ohm Terminated Cable = 20 to 30 dB  
Antenna = 10 to 20 dB  
Return loss measurements below 25 dB should be considered  
excellent. For best results, the cable output should be terminated in  
50 ohms.  
E n ter in g Ca b le Len gt h  
The greatest accuracy is obtained when you enter a cable length  
slightly greater than the actual cable length, considering length  
uncertainty. If you are not sure of the cable length, enter a value 1.5  
times the estimated length. Depending on the return loss of the  
antenna or device at the end of the cable, you may see a high relative  
mismatch displayed at the actual length of the cable.  
64  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
R ep lot Da t a F iles  
This utility allows you to easily retrieve and display plots which were  
previously stored on an SRAM PC card. One or two plots may be  
displayed at one time.  
No measurements are performed.  
Tr a n sfer St or ed Da t a  
This utility may be used to easily transfer data collection files (test  
results) from an SRAM PC card over the serial or HP-IB port. You do  
not need to write an IBASIC program. No measurements are  
performed.  
SA (sp ect r u m a n a lyzer ) Self Ca libr a t ion ON/OF F  
This test allows you to check the status of the Test Sets spectrum  
analyzer, and change the status if you desire.  
The RFTOOLS program uses the Test Sets internal spectrum analyzer  
for making network analyzer measurements. The internal spectrum  
analyzer performs an automatic self calibration every 5 minutes. This  
automatic self calibration insures that the spectrum analyzer operates  
within specified limits regardless of the operating temperature.  
However, this self calibration can introduce instability in spectrum  
analyzer output after the Test Set is operating at a constant  
temperature (after approximately 30 minutes).  
Each RFTOOLS test includes two parts; calibration and measurement.  
If the spectrum analyzer performs a self calibration between the  
calibration and measurement of the RFTOOLS test, the spectrum  
analyzer automatic self calibration instability will increase RFTOOLS  
test measurement error. To avoid this problem, you may use this test to  
turn off the spectrum analyzer self calibration. This self calibration  
should only be turned off after the unit has reached a constant  
powered-on operating temperature (approximately 30 minutes after  
power-on). By turning the self calibration off, the measurement  
accuracy and stability of RFTOOLS tests will improve.  
Chapter 3  
65  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using RF Tools Program  
Ca t a log P C (Mem or y) Ca r d  
This utility lists all the files contained on the PC card. The PC card that  
you want to catalog must be inserted prior to selecting this test.  
• LIF file types are denoted by the following prefixes and suffixes:  
c prefix denotes a program code file  
l prefix denotes a library file  
p prefix denotes a procedure file  
_d suffix denotes a data file  
_p suffix denotes a plot file  
DOS file types are denoted by the following suffixes:  
.PGM suffix denotes a program code file  
.LIB suffix denotes a library file  
.PRC suffix denotes a procedure file  
.DAT suffix denotes a data file  
.PLT suffix denotes a plot file  
Set Up P r in t er /Da t a Collect ion  
This utility allows you to collect measurement data using a printer or a  
PCMCIA card. The following table shows the parameters that can be  
set using this utility. These parameters can also be found on the  
PRINTER CONFIGURE screen and the I/O CONFIGURE screen.  
Ta b le 3-3  
P a r a m et er s for Set Up P r in ter a n d Da t a Collect ion  
Data Collection  
Printer  
Printer  
Configuration  
Output  
Heading 1  
Off  
Off  
Output  
Heading 2  
Lines/Page  
Serial 9  
Serial 9  
Form feed at  
start of page  
Serial Baud  
Serial Baud  
Parity  
Parity  
Form feed at  
end of page  
Data Length  
Stop Length  
Flow Control  
Data Length  
Stop Length  
Flow Control  
HPIB Address  
None  
None  
Xon/Xoff  
Hardware  
Xon/Xoff  
Hardware  
PCMCIA  
Parallel 15  
HPIB 701  
66  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the Code Domain Analyzer  
Usin g th e Cod e Dom a in An a lyzer  
The code domain analyzer graphically displays the power, phase, and  
timing of the CDMA signals 64 Walsh channels. It is a correlated  
measurement, requiring an external timing signal, such as the even  
second clock or the 16 × chip (19.6608 MHz) clock, to initiate a valid  
measurement.  
Select in g t h e Cod e Dom a in An a lyzer s Con t r ols Men u s  
Several levels of menus are used to access the various controls  
associated with the code domain analyzer. "Control Fields for CDMA  
Measurements" on page 93 provides a description for each field on the  
code domain analyzers menus. See "CDMA Measurements" on page 82  
and the HP 8935 CDMA Base Sta tion Tests Applications Guide for more  
information about code domain measurements.  
F igu r e 3-2  
Cod e Dom a in An a lyzer Men u s  
Chapter 3  
67  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the Spectrum Analyzer  
Usin g th e Sp ectr u m An a lyzer  
Au t om a t ic Ca lib r a t ion  
During operation, the spectrum analyzer pauses for approximately  
2 seconds every 5 minutes to recalibrate itself. This does not affect the  
accuracy of displayed measurements, but does cause a brief  
interruption of the displayed information during the process.  
Set t in g R esolu t ion Ba n d w id th a n d Sw eep Ra t e  
The resolution bandwidth and sweep rate are determined by the span  
setting, and cannot be set independently.  
These settings are listed in the following table.  
Ta b le 3-4  
R ela tion sh ip Bet w een Sp a n , R esolu t ion Ba n d w id t h , a n d Sw eep R a t e  
R esolu tion BW  
Sp a n  
<50 kHz  
Sw eep R a te  
(k H z)  
0.3  
28.6 kHz/second  
329.0 kHz/second  
3.0 MHz/second  
21.4 MHz/second  
36.3 MHz/second  
257.0 MHz/second  
1.0 GHz/second  
<200 kHz  
<1.5 MHz  
<3 MHz  
1.0  
3.0  
30.0  
30.0  
300.0  
300.0  
<18 MHz  
<200 MHz  
1 GHz  
68  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the Spectrum Analyzer  
Select in g t h e Sp ect r u m An a lyzer s Con t r ols Men u s  
Several levels of menus are used to access the various controls  
associated with the spectrum analyzer (see "Spectrum Analyzer  
"Control Fields for Analog Measurements" on page 123 provides a  
description for each field on the spectrum analyzers menus.  
F igu r e 3-3  
Sp e ct r u m An a lyzer Con tr ols Men u s  
Chapter 3  
69  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the Voltmeter and Audio Frequency Counter  
Usin g th e Voltm et er a n d Au d io F r eq u en cy Cou n ter  
The voltmeter can be used to measure ac and dc voltages. The input to  
the voltmeter is determined by the AF Anl Infield on the AF  
ANALYZER screen.  
To measure external voltages:  
1. Select the AF ANALYZER screen.  
2. Set the AF Anl In field to Audio In.  
3. Set the Audio In Lo field to match the source you are measuring  
(600 ohm impedance, floating output amplifier, ground referenced  
voltage). See the "Audio In Lo" field on page 127 for more  
information.  
4. Connect the signal to be measured to the AUDIO IN connector(s).  
The AUDIO IN HI connector can be used alone as long as the Audio  
In Lofield is set to Gnd. The AUDIO IN LO connector must also be  
used if the Audio In Lofield is set to 600 to Hior Float.  
The ac level is displayed. See Figure 3-4 .  
5. Select the lower-right measurement display field. See Figure 3-4 .  
Select DC Levelto display the dc level.  
Select AF Freqto display the audio frequency.  
F igu r e 3-4  
Mea su r in g AC a n d DC Volta ge s  
AC Level  
Set to  
DC Level or  
AF Freq.  
Set to  
Audio In.  
Set to match  
source.  
70  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the Oscilloscope (Scope)  
Usin g th e Oscilloscop e (Scop e)  
The built-in 50 kHz oscilloscope provides  
multiple triggering formats (internal and external)  
single-shot and pre-trigger viewing for single events  
full marker capability with automatic level and time readout  
Time/division, volts/division and vertical offset are displayed and can be  
changed using the front-panel knob.  
Input to the oscilloscope is provided from various sources including  
direct inputs to the AUDIO IN (HI and LO) and ANALOG  
MODULATION IN connectors. Oscilloscope functions are accessed from  
the AF ANALYZER and SCOPE screens.  
F igu r e 3-5  
FM Demod  
In p u ts a n d F ilter s for t h e Oscilloscop e  
Controlled by  
AF Anl In  
field  
Controlled by  
Scope To  
field  
Input  
AM Demod  
SSB Demod  
Audio In connector  
Ext Mod connector  
FM Mod  
Filters  
To  
Scope  
De-emp  
AM Mod  
To  
Notch  
Scope Monitor  
Output connector  
Audio Out  
Chapter 3  
71  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the Oscilloscope (Scope)  
Select in g th e Oscilloscop es In p u t  
Step 1. Press Shift, then RF Anl (AF Anl) to select the AF ANALYZER  
screen.  
Step 2. Select the AF Anl Infield. A list of choices appears.  
St ep 3. Select the desired input to the scope:  
FM Demodfor FM demodulated audio from input signals connected  
to the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN connectors.  
AM Demodfor AM demodulated audio from input signals connected  
to the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN connectors.  
SSB Demod for SSB demodulated audio from input signals  
connected to the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN connectors.  
Audio Infor a signal connected to the AUDIO IN connector.  
Ext Modfor a signal connected to the ANALOG MODULATION IN  
connector.  
FM Modfor the FM modulated audio from the RF generator section.  
AM Modfor the AM modulated audio from the RF generator section.  
Audio Out for the signal present at the SCOPE MONITOR  
OUTPUT connector.  
The input to the oscilloscope is displayed on the SCOPE screen.  
Select in g th e Oscilloscop es F ilter s  
St ep 1. Press Shift, then RF Anl (AF Anl) to select the AF ANALYZER  
screen.  
St ep 2. Select the Scope Tofield. A list of choices should appear.  
St ep 3. Select the desired filtering for the signal:  
Inputif you want no filtering (dc coupled)  
Filtersto route the audio to the oscilloscope after passing through  
Filters 1 and 2 (ac coupled).  
De-empto route the audio to the oscilloscope after passing through  
Filters 1 and 2, and the de-emphasis circuitry (ac coupled).  
Notchto route the audio to the oscilloscope after passing through  
Filters #1 and #2, the de-emphasis circuitry, and notch circuitry (ac  
coupled).  
72  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the Oscilloscope (Scope)  
Tr igger in g t h e Oscilloscop e  
You can control following triggering features of the oscilloscope:  
Trigger external or internal  
Automated or normal triggering  
Continuous or single shot triggering  
Trigger level  
Trigger delay  
The oscilloscope is triggered using the Trigger menu. Select this menu  
with the following procedure:  
Ste p 1. Press Shift, then Spec Anl (Scope) to go to the SCOPE screen.  
Ste p 2. Select the Controlsfield, then choose Triggerfrom the list  
of choices.  
Usin g t h e Oscilloscop es Ma r k er  
The marker is used to help you make measurements with the  
oscilloscope. By repositioning the marker, you can measure the level  
and time.  
The marker is controlled using the marker menu. Select this menu with  
the following procedure:  
Ste p 1. Press Shift, then Spec Anl (Scope)to go to the SCOPE screen.  
Ste p 2. Select the Controlsfield, the choose Markerfrom the list of  
choices.  
Chapter 3  
73  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using IB_UTIL Programs  
Usin g IB_UTIL P r ogr a m s  
See "Securing a Test Procedure" on page 75 for information about the  
SECURE_IT program. See "Clearing RAM" on page 76 for information  
about the RAM_MANAGER program.  
COP Y_P L  
The COPY_PL program allows you to copy procedures and libraries  
from one PC card to another. See the HP 8935 Programmers Guide for  
more information about procedures and libraries.  
F ILE _XF E R  
The FILE_XFER (file transfer) program transfers files on a PC card to a  
device attached to either the HP-IB or to SERIAL PORT 9.  
RAM_USAGE  
The RAM_USAGE program lists the following information about the  
Test Sets RAM:  
Total RAM installed  
RAM disk allocations  
Save register allocations  
Approximate RAM available for IBASIC programs  
74  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Securing a Test Procedure  
Secu r in g a Test P r oced u r e  
The password option for securing a test procedure is accessed by  
loading and running the SECURE_ITROM program. This program is  
accessed by running the IB_UTILprogram.  
Ste p 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.  
Ste p 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose  
ROM.  
Ste p 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.  
a . Select IB_UTILfrom the list of programs. Press Run Testto  
display a list of procedures; select SECURE_ITand follow  
directions to secure the desired information.  
Chapter 3  
75  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Clearing RAM  
Clea r in g R AM  
RAM can be cleared using the RAM_MANAGERprogram in the Test Sets  
ROM. This program clears all RAM, including any SAVE/RECALL  
registers saved to InternalRAM.  
This program is accessed by running the IB_UTILprogram.  
St ep 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.  
St ep 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose  
ROM.  
St ep 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.  
• Select IB_UTILfrom the list of programs. Press Run Testto  
display a list of procedures; select RAM_MANAGERand follow  
directions to clear RAM.  
To preserve the SAVE/RECALL registers, do not use the RAM_MANAGER  
program. Instead, load any other test program from a card or from RAM  
to clear the previous test program, and then reload the desired test.  
See the "Save/Recall" field on page 179, and "Saving and Recalling  
Instrument Setups" field on page 48 for more information about  
save/recall registers.  
76  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the LISTOPTS (list options) Program  
Usin g th e LISTOP TS (list op t ion s) P r ogr a m  
You can list the options that are installed in your Test Set (if any) using  
the LISTOPTS program. LISTOPTS also displays the firmware version  
of your Test Set.  
To run the LISTOPTS program  
Ste p 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.  
Ste p 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose  
ROM.  
Ste p 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.  
Ste p 4. Select LISTOPTSfrom the list of programs.  
Ste p 5. Press Run Testto run the program and follow the directions  
on the screen.  
Chapter 3  
77  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the DEMO Program  
Usin g th e DE MO P r ogr a m  
You can use the DEMO program to learn about the capabilities of the  
Test Set. This program demonstrates some of the most useful features  
of the Test Set.  
To run the DEMO program  
St ep 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.  
St ep 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose  
ROM.  
St ep 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.  
St ep 4. Select DEMOfrom the list of programs.  
St ep 5. Press Run Testto run the program and follow the directions  
on the screen.  
78  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the ST_PLT (store or plot) Program  
Usin g th e ST_P LT (stor e or p lot) P r ogr a m  
This program allows you to store a spectrum analyzer, or oscilloscope  
trace on PC card or to plot a stored trace from a PC card.  
To run the ST_PLT program  
Ste p 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.  
Ste p 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose  
ROM.  
Ste p 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.  
Ste p 4. Select ST_PLTfrom the list of programs.  
Ste p 5. Press k1 (Run Test) to run the program and follow the  
directions on the screen.  
Ste p 6. Press k2 (Show Info) to display the traces parameters (such  
as frequency, level, span, and so forth).  
Chapter 3  
79  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools  
Using the ST_PLT (store or plot) Program  
80  
Chapter3  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Average Power Measurements  
Average Power Measurements  
CDMA Mea su r em en ts  
Aver a ge P ow er Mea su r em en ts  
Avg P w r  
Avg Pwrdisplays the average power level of all signals at the RF  
IN/OUT port. The units (watts, volts, or dBm) can be changed by  
positioning the cursor in front of the units field and then pressing the  
desired units key. (See "Input Port" field on page 136.) Refer to the  
HP 8935 CDMA Base Station Tests Applications Guide for more  
information about average power measurements.  
Scr e en s on w h ich th is m ea su r e m en t is d isp la yed .  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
ADC F S  
ADC FSis displayed when average power is measured. ADC FS  
indicates how close the measured power level is to the maximum  
allowed input level at the RF IN/OUT port for a particular Pwr Gain  
setting (on the CDMA ANALYZER screen). Changes to ADC FS can be  
made by altering the Pwr Gainfield setting and by altering the signal  
level into the RF IN/OUT port. ADC FS should be between 1.0 and 10  
dB when the Pwr Gainfield is set to Auto, and can be manually set up  
to 0.5 dB when set to Hold. The measurement will be aborted if ADC  
FS goes above 0.5 dB. Measurement accuracy may be degraded if ADC  
FS goes below 10 dB.  
Scr e en s on w h ich th is m ea su r e m en t is d isp la yed .  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
82  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Channel Power Measurements  
Channel Power Measurements  
Ch a n n el P ow er Mea su r em en ts  
Ch a n P w r  
Channel power is the absolute power level of the RF signal in a  
1.23 MHz bandwidth centered around the RF channel or tune  
frequency setting. This measurement must be calibrated using the  
Chan Pwr Calfield each time the tune frequency is changed. Refer to  
the HP 8935 CDMA Ba se Station Tests Applications Guide for more  
information about channel power measurements.  
ADC F S  
ADC FSis displayed when channel power is measured. ADC FS  
indicates how close the measured power level is to the maximum  
allowed input level at the RF IN/OUT port for a particular Gainsetting  
(on the CDMA ANALYZER screen). Changes to ADC FS can be made  
by altering the Gainfield setting and by altering the signal level into  
the RF IN/OUT port. ADC FS should be between 1.0 and 10 dB when  
the Gainfield is set to Auto, and can be manually set up to 0.5 dB  
when set to Hold. The measurement will be aborted if ADC FS goes  
above 0.5 dB. Measurement accuracy may be degraded if ADC FS goes  
below 10 dB.  
Scr ee n s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed .  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Chapter 4  
83  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Rho Measurements  
Rho Measurements  
Rh o Mea su r em en ts  
Rh o  
Rho is a measure of CDMA waveform quality which indicates how well  
the measured signal (the pilot signal transmitted by the base station  
under test) correlates with the ideal reference waveform (the ideal pilot  
generated by the Test Set which is mathematically perfect). This  
measurement is done through a complex DSP algorithm. Perfect  
correlation is when rho is equal to 1. The CDMA standard specifies  
0.912 as the minimum accepted performance for CDMA base stations.  
To make rho measurements, the base station needs to be configured to  
transmit only a pilot signal. The test equipment is then triggered by  
any of the selectable CDMA clocks.  
Many different things can contribute to rho failure; this is a short list of  
them:  
compression in the linear power amplifier  
phase non-linearities (group delay)  
carrier feedthrough (see "Carrier Feedthrough" on page 87)  
I/Q magnitude and phase errors (see "Magnitude Error" on page 88  
F igu r e 4-1 R h o  
Power that correlates with ideal  
ρ
Total Power  
Signal Power  
ρ
ρ
Signal Power + Error Power  
0.912  
Scr e en s on w h ich th is m ea su r e m en t is d isp la yed .  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
84  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Rho Measurements  
Rho Measurements  
F r equ en cy Er r or  
Frequency error is displayed when the Rhomeasurement is selected.  
Frequency error is the difference between the base stations transmitter  
frequency and the frequency you enter in the Tune Freqfield.  
Scr ee n s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed .  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Tim e Offset  
Time offset is displayed when the Rhomeasurement is selected. Time  
offset is the time difference between the base stations even second and  
the start of the short sequence. It indicates how well your transmitters  
signal is time-aligned to system time. Time offset is measured at the  
base stations antenna. The displayed value is based on the value  
entered in the PN Offsetfield. (See the PN Offset field description, on  
In Figure 4-2 on page 86 the first example is a measurement with a  
time offset of zero. The beginning of the received data block aligns with  
the first pilot PN chip of the reference signal. Zero time offset indicates  
that the trigger event to the CDMA Analyzer coincided with the arrival  
of the base station signals first pilot PN chip.  
When the base stations signal is delayed relative to the trigger event,  
time offset will be a positive value. The second example is a  
measurement with a positive time offset. The beginning of the data  
block will align with a portion of the reference signal toward the end of  
a pilot PN sequence. This indicates that the trigger event to the CDMA  
Analyzer occurred when the base station was still transmitting a pilot  
PN sequence prior to the first pilot PN chip of the expected sequence.  
When the base stations signal is early relative to the trigger event,  
time offset will be a negative value. The third example is a  
measurement with a negative time offset. The beginning of the data  
block will align with a portion of the reference signal after the first pilot  
PN chip. This indicates that the trigger event to the CDMA Analyzer  
occurred after arrival of the base station signals first pilot PN chip.  
Scr ee n s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed .  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)  
Chapter 4  
85  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Rho Measurements  
Rho Measurements  
F igu r e 4-2 Tim e Offset  
86  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Rho Measurements  
Rho Measurements  
Ca r r ier F eed t h r ou gh  
Carrier feedthrough is displayed when the Rhomeasurement is  
selected. Carrier feedthrough is a common cause of bad rho  
measurements. Carrier feedthrough is a result of RF carrier signal  
feeding through the I/Q modulator and getting on the output circuitry  
without getting modulated. A good carrier feedthrough level is lower  
than 25 dB (such as 29 dB).  
As shown in the diagram, a perfect constellation is offset by the  
magnitude of the carrier feedthrough. In the frequency domain, carrier  
feedthrough can show up as an uncorrelated energy spike that can be  
seen on the spectrum analyzer by closely scanning the top of the trace.  
The effects of carrier feedthrough can also show up as higher noise  
levels on the CODE DOM screen. The inactive Walsh codes will be  
pushing the 27 dB specification for noise. Carrier feedthrough can be  
caused by the lack of isolation across the mixer and cavity of the  
transmitters I/Q modulator. Shielding can help reduce carrier  
feedthrough.  
F igu r e 4-3 Ca r r ie r F ee d t h r ou gh  
1
Am p lit u de  
Ca r r ier F ee dt h r ou gh  
I
d
e
a
l
)
S ign a l P ow er + E r r or P ow e r  
or igin  
F r equ en cy  
I/Q Dom a in  
F r equ en cy Dom a in  
Scr ee n s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed .  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)  
Chapter 4  
87  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) Measurements  
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) Measurements  
E r r or Vect or Ma gn itu d e (E VM) Mea su r em en t s  
EVM  
EVMis a measurement of the accuracy of the phase and amplitude of the  
QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) or Offset QPSK (OQPSK)  
modulation. Expressed as a percentage, it is the RMS magnitude value  
of the error vector which connects the ideal signal phasor to a measured  
signal phasor at the detection decision points.  
F igu r e 4-4 Com p on e n ts of Er r or Vector Ma gn itu d e  
Q
Magnitude Error  
I
evm1.ds4  
The magnitude of this error vector represents the error” between the  
ideal signal and the measured signal.  
As part of the measurement, the signal is corrected for clock delay,  
carrier frequency, carrier phase, and amplitude scaling.  
Scr e en s on w h ich th is m ea su r e m en t is d isp la yed .  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Ma gn itu d e E r r or  
Magnitude Erroris the difference in the RMS magnitude value (in  
percent) between the ideal signal phasor and the compensated,  
measured signal phasor at the detected decision points.  
P h a se E r r or  
Phase Erroris the RMS value of the difference in phase (degrees)  
between the ideal signal phasor and the compensated, measured signal  
phasor at the detection decision points.  
88  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Code Domain Measurements  
Code Domain Measurements  
Cod e Dom a in Mea su r em en t s  
The following measurements are displayed on the CODE DOM (code  
domain analyzer) screen: power, fast power, timing and phase.  
Measurements are selected from the Measurementfield on the Main  
controls menu.  
Time offset (Tm Ofs) and frequency offset (FreqOfs) are always  
displayed when any code domain measurement is made. Carrier  
feedthrough (CarFT) is also displayed except when fast power is  
measured.  
Code Domain Power  
Other users & noise  
Synch  
Paging  
Frequency Domain  
Pilot  
User #2  
User #1  
freq  
1.2288 MHz  
Code Domain  
Walsh Code  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
32  
63  
User User  
User  
3
Paging  
Pilot  
Synch  
1
2
Chapter 4  
89  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Code Domain Measurements  
Code Domain Measurements  
Cod e Dom a in P ow er (P ow er )  
Code domain power displays the power in each of the 64 Walsh  
channels, relative to the total power inside 1.23 MHz bandwidth  
centered at the tune frequency. The 64 Walsh codes (0 through 63) are  
represented by a vertical bar on the analyzers display. Because this is a  
relative measurement, the unit-of-measure is always dB. This allows a  
comparison of signal levels between the pilot, sync, paging and traffic  
channels. (Pilot is about two-thirds of the total energy.)  
F igu r e 4-5 R ea d in g Cod e Dom a in P ow er  
Walsh 0  
(Pilot)  
Marker  
Set to  
Marker.  
Select the Walsh  
channel.  
Read code  
domain power.  
Scr e en s on w h ich th is m ea su r e m en t is d isp la yed .  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)  
90  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Code Domain Measurements  
Code Domain Measurements  
F a st P ow er  
Fast power is a faster method of measuring code domain power. A value  
for Time Offset must be transferred from a non-fast power  
measurement before fast measurements begin, or when changes to any  
of the following fields occur: Data Rate, PN Offset, CDMA TB, Synth  
Ref.  
See the "Ofs Trnsfer" field on page 105 for more information.  
The number of measurement averages can be entered in the Num Avgs  
field on the FP Setup menu. This number is used to calculate and  
display successive code domain power measurements.  
Scr ee n s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed .  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)  
Cod e Dom a in Tim in g (Tim in g)  
Code domain timing is the difference in time between pilot (Walsh 0)  
and other Walsh codes with the same forward CDMA channel. In the  
CODE DOM screen, this measurement is indicated as positive or  
negative bar with the size of the bar indicating how far ahead or behind  
the other Walsh channels are relative to the pilot. Signals above the  
reference are leading in time; signals below the reference are lagging.  
(See figure 4-6.)  
Scr ee n s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed .  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)  
Chapter 4  
91  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Code Domain Measurements  
Code Domain Measurements  
Cod e Dom a in P h a se (P h a se)  
Code domain phase is the difference in phase between the pilot and  
other code channels (Walsh codes) within the same forward CDMA  
channel. It displays the phase error for each of the 64 Walsh channels  
relative to the pilot channel (Walsh 0). This measurement is indicated  
as positive or negative bars on the Test Sets CODE DOM screen. The  
size of the bar indicates how much the phase of other Walsh codes lead  
or lag the pilot. Signals above the reference are leading in phase;  
signals below the reference are lagging.  
F igu r e 4-6 Cod e Dom a in Tim in g a n d P h a se  
Scr e en s on w h ich th is m ea su r e m en t is d isp la yed .  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)  
92  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
ADCfs or ADC FS  
Amplitude  
Con t r ol F ield s for CDMA Mea su r em en ts  
ADCfs or ADC F S  
ADCfs indicates how close the measured power level is to the maximum  
allowed input level for the analyzers Analog-to-Digital Converter  
(ADC). This level is affected by the Gainsetting on the CODE DOM  
screen, the Input Atten, Gain, and, Pwr Gainsettings on the CDMA  
ANALYZER screen, and the RF level of the signal connected to the Test  
Set.  
For best measurement performance, ADCfs should be between 1.0 and  
10 dB. The measurement will be aborted if ADCfs goes above 0 dB.  
Measurement accuracy may be degraded if ADCfs goes below 10 dB.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer) screen: gain controls menu  
CDMA ANALYZER (ADC FS)  
CDMA GENERATOR (ADC FS)  
Am p litu d e  
This field sets the output level of the RF generator to the RF IN/OUT or  
DUPLEX OUT port. Use the DUPLEX OUT port for signal levels  
greater than 26 dBm.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Chapter 4  
93  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Analyzer (CDMA analyzer)  
Analyzer (code domain analyzer)  
An a lyzer (CDMA a n a lyzer )  
The Analyzerfield controls three functions:  
Arm Measarms the CDMA analyzer. The CDMA analyzer needs to  
be armed only when Single(see below) is selected.  
Single/Contselects between single” measurements and  
“continuous” measurements.  
When Singleis chosen, you must arm each measurement by  
selecting the Arm Measfield (see above).  
When Cont(continuous) is chosen, measurements are  
automatically armed.  
The default selection is Cont.  
Disarmdisarms the CDMA analyzer during single operation. To  
stop continuous measurements, select Single. Selecting Disarm  
does not prevent the analyzer from being re-armed during  
continuous measurements  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
An a lyzer (cod e d om a in a n a lyzer )  
This field is used to arm or disarm measurements when making a  
single measurement (does not affect continuous measurements).  
Selecting Disarmstops the analyzer during a single measurement.  
See the "Measurement" field on page 104 for more information.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu  
94  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Anl Dir  
Auto Zero  
An l Dir  
This field is used to select the type of signal (forward or reverse link) to  
analyze.  
Fwdsets the analyzer to look for base station transmitter data  
(forward link).  
Revsets the analyzer to look for mobile transmitter data (reverse  
link).  
Default selection: Fwd  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
An l Sp ecia l  
Analyzer special modes change how IQ modulated signals are analyzed.  
Normalsets the CDMA generator and CDMA analyzer to create and  
analyze signals with standard rotation.  
Invertedsets reverse rotation for I and Q signals; opposite to the  
direction specified in the IS-95 standards. In this mode, the CDMA  
generator creates reverse-rotation IQ signals and the CDMA  
analyzer expects reverse-rotation IQ signals.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
Au t o Zer o  
This field is displayed for average power measurements.  
Autois used to automatically zero the average power measurement  
periodically during operation.  
Manualis used to override the Autofeature. When Manualis selected,  
you must manually zero the average power measurement by selecting  
the Pwr Zerofield.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
Chapter 4  
95  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Car FT  
Chn Pwr Cal  
Ca r F T  
This field is a measurement display field. See "Carrier Feedthrough" on  
page 87 for more information about this measurement.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)  
Ch n P w r Ca l  
This field is displayed when the channel power measurement is  
selected. It is used to calibrate the channel power measurement. When  
this field is selected, an internally generated calibration signal is  
measured using the average power technique. Channel power is also  
measured and a correction factor is generated. This correction factor is  
applied to subsequent channel power measurements. Calibration  
should be performed whenever a new set of measurements is made and  
whenever the frequency of the measured signal is changed. See  
"Calibrating the Channel Power Measurement" on page 41 for more  
information.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
96  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Controls  
Controls  
Con t r ols  
Code domain analyzer settings are arranged into several menus that  
are accessed using the Controlsfield. The control groups are:  
Mainaccesses the RF In/Ant, Tune Freq (or RF Channel),  
Measurement, and Analyzerfields.  
Markercontrols the marker to look at the level of individual Walsh  
channels.  
Triggeraccesses the trigger controls: Qual Eventand Trig  
Event.  
Auxaccesses the PN Offset, measurement Threshold, and  
measurement Intervalfields.  
Gainlets you alter the gain into the CDMA analyzer while reading  
the ADCfsvalue.  
FP Setupaccesses the offset transfer and number of averages fields  
used to make fast power measurements.  
Many of these controls are duplicates from the CDMA ANALYZER and  
CDMA GENERATOR screens.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): all menus  
Chapter 4  
97  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
CW RF Path  
Data Rate  
CW R F P a t h  
This field selects the path for the RF generators signal.  
Bypassdisables the IQ modulator. This mode is used when  
generating standard AM, FM, or CW signals in the Test Set.  
IQenables the IQ modulator.  
See the "Data Source" field on page 99 for more information.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Da t a Ra t e  
This field allows receiver testing at data rates of 9.6 or 14.4 Kbps.  
If the data buffer is the selected data source, and the data rate is  
changed, the transmission state will change to Idle. Select Sendto  
resume data output at the new rate.  
Choices  
14.4 Kbps  
9.6 Kbps  
Default selection: 9.6 Kbps  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
98  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Data Source  
Data Source  
Da t a Sou r ce  
This field selects where the baseband quadrature spreader gets its  
data. This field is removed when the Gen Modefield is set to Noise.  
Zeroesuses a data stream of all 0s that is not encoded before being  
applied to the baseband quadrature spreader and output.  
Extuses external data from the DATA IN connector. This data is not  
encoded before being applied to the baseband quadrature spreader.  
Randomuses 300 frames of random, error-free data. (See Data Buff  
(below) for Single/Cont, Idle/Sendoperation.)  
Data Buffuses data previously loaded into the data buffer. You can  
load your own data into the buffer over HP-IB. This data is encoded  
before baseband quadrature spreading. Choosing this selection  
displays these additional fields:  
Single/Cont  
Singlecauses the data stream to be output once when Send  
is selected.  
Contcauses the data stream to be repeated continuously when  
Sendis selected. Changing to single operation while sending  
causes the data to be interrupted after the current 20 ms  
frame.  
Send/Idle  
Sendcauses the data stream to be output after two rising  
edges of the internal 80 ms clock are detected.  
Idleindicates that data from the buffer is not being  
transmitted. Selecting Idlewhile sending data interrupts the  
data at the completion of the current 20 ms frame. A data  
stream of all zeroes (encoded) continues to be transmitted after  
the initial data stream is interrupted. This is different from  
the Zeroesselection above where the data is not encoded.  
Start Framespecifies the first frame of data to send.  
# of Framesspecifies how many frames of data to send.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Chapter 4  
99  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Even Sec In  
Gain  
Even Sec In  
This field controls the internal connection of the EVEN SECOND  
SYNC IN connector to the CDMA analyzer.  
When Enableis selected, signals applied to the EVEN SECOND  
SYNC IN connector synchronize the timing circuits.  
When Notis selected, input signals applied to the EVEN SECOND  
SYNC IN are ignored. This mode may be useful when signals other  
than an even-second clock are used for synchronization. For  
example, when using a one-second clock, you would select Notafter  
synchronization to prevent the internal even-second clock from being  
retriggered half-way through its cycle.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
F r eq Er r  
This measurement display field displays the frequency offset (frequency  
error). See "Frequency Error" on page 85 for more information about  
this measurement.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)  
Ga in  
This field sets the IF gain of the CDMA analyzer for rho, EVM, and  
channel power measurements. (Range: 0 dB to 36 dB in 6 dB steps.)  
Gain is adjusted two ways:  
Automeasures the signal level and automatically adjusts the gain.  
Holddisables automatic operation to allow you to manually enter  
the desired gain by selecting the current gain setting and entering a  
new value using the keypad or cursor control knob.  
This field is replaced by the Pwr Gainfield when measuring average  
power. See the "Input Atten" field on page 102 for more information.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA Analyzer  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): gain controls menu  
100  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Gen Dir  
Gen Mode  
Gen Dir  
This field sets the link direction of the CDMA signal.  
Fwd(forward) sets the CDMA generator to produce QPSK  
modulation to imitate a base station. The EQ Filterfield is  
automatically set to EQ Into apply an equalizing filter to the I and  
Q paths as part of the baseband filtering, but it can be changed to  
Out.  
Rev(reverse) sets the CDMA generator to produce OQPSK  
modulation to imitate a mobile station. The EQ Filterfield is  
automatically set to Out(and cannot be changed) to remove the  
equalizing filter from the I and Q paths.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Gen Mod e  
This field selects the type of modulation information sent to the CDMA  
generators IQ modulator.  
Dataallows data to be transmitted to simulate a traffic channel with  
no additive noise. (See the"Data Source" field on page 99.)  
Eb/Nocauses a combination of data and White Gaussian Noise  
(AWGN) noise to be transmitted. The value entered is the ratio  
between the energy of each information bit (Eb) and the noise  
spectral density (No), expressed in dB.  
Noisecauses a signal modulated by White Gaussian Noise to be  
generated. The noise is band limited to 2 MHz and white inside a  
1.25 MHz bandwidth centered around the RF Gen Freq. This  
selection removes the Data Source, Start Frame, and # of  
Framesfields from the screen; those fields are only used with the  
Dataand Eb/Noentries.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Chapter 4  
101  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Gen Special  
Input Atten  
Gen Sp ecia l  
Generator special modes change how IQ modulated signals are  
generated.  
Normalsets the CDMA generator and CDMA analyzer to create and  
analyze signals with standard rotation.  
Invertedsets reverse rotation for I and Q signals; opposite to the  
direction specified in the IS-95 standards. In this mode, the CDMA  
generator creates reverse-rotation IQ signals and the CDMA  
analyzer expects reverse-rotation IQ signals.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
In p u t Att en  
This field controls the RF attenuators of the Test Set. If an ADC  
Overdrivenmessage is displayed at the top of the screen while  
making measurements, increase the attenuator setting until the  
message is no longer displayed. This is the coarse level adjustment for  
the signal level into the CDMA analyzer. Fine level adjustment is  
performed using the Gainfield.  
See the "Gain" field on page 100 for more information.  
NOTE  
The Input Attensetting does not affect, and is not  
displayed with, the average power measurement.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): gain controls menu  
102  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Input Port  
Meas Intvl  
In p u t P or t  
This field selects which Test Set port to use as the RF input. This field  
is not displayed when measuring average power, since you must use the  
RF IN/OUT port to measure average power.  
CAUTION  
Instrument Damage  
To prevent instrument damage, do not exceed the  
maximum power level labeled at the connectors on your  
Test Set. The ANT IN connector is for measuring low level  
RF signals. High level (>60 mW) transmitter signals must  
be measured using the RF IN/OUT port.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu  
Lvl  
This measurement displays the relative level of the selected Walsh  
channel when compared to the total power in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth  
centered around the Tune Freqsetting. The measurement is displayed  
when the code domain analyzers main controls Measurementfield is  
set to Poweror Fast Pwr.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): marker controls menu  
Mea s In t vl  
This field determines the length of the data block. The data block is a  
time record over which correlated measurements are computed. As the  
interval is increased, measurement time is increased. Increasing the  
interval gives more accurate measurement results, particularly with  
frequency error and phase error measurements.  
This field is displayed on the CDMA ANALYZER screen when a rho or  
EVM measurement is selected. It is also displayed on the CODE DOM  
(Code Domain Analyzer) controls menu.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): controls menu  
Chapter 4  
103  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Measurement  
Num Avgs  
Mea su r em en t  
This field controls the type of code domain measurement to make:  
power, timing, or phase. It also controls the measurement "mode."  
Singleis used when you want to make one measurement. You must  
select the Arm Measfunction of the Analyzerfield before a  
measurement can be made.  
Contis used to continuously make measurements. Measurements  
are automatically re-armed after each measurement.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu  
Nu m Avgs  
The number of averages determines how many measurements are  
averaged when measuring fast power. Averaging reduces measurement  
speed.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): fast power setup controls menu  
104  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Ofs Trnsfer  
Output Port  
Ofs Tr n sfer  
This field transfers the time offset value from the time offset  
measurement (displayed in TmOfs) to the Time Offsetfield  
automatically. Before selecting Ofs Trnsfer, you must make at least  
one of the following code domain measurements:  
Power  
Timing  
Phase  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
When using this command programmatically, be sure a value for Tm  
Ofshas been obtained from a power, timing, or phase measurement.  
(One method of ensuring the measurement has been completed would  
be to send an HP-IB command to query the results of the Tm Ofsfield  
before sending the transfer command).  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): fast power setup controls menu  
Ou t p u t P or t  
This field selects the output port for the signal from the Test Sets RF  
and CDMA generators.  
RF Outselects the RF IN/OUT connector.  
Duplselects the DUPLEX OUT connector.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Chapter 4  
105  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
PN Offset  
Pwr Gain  
P N Offset  
Use this field to enter the PN sequence offset index for your base  
station. Each whole offset is equal to 64 chips (= 52.08 µs). Fractional  
values are rounded off, and can be entered, in increments of 0.015625  
(1 chip). Once entered, this value is shared by all CDMA screens.  
This value is used by the analyzer when the Even Sec Infield on the  
CDMA GENERATOR screen is set to Enable.  
NOTE  
When the Even Sec Infield is set to Not, changes to the  
PN Offsetfield have no effect on the analyzer.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): auxiliary controls menu  
P w r Ga in  
This field is used to set the level into the CDMA analyzer when making  
average power measurements. Levels are set in 6 dB increments. The  
IF signal level is displayed as ADC FS when average power is  
measured, and should be between 1.0 and 5 dB for best measurement  
results.  
Autoautomatically sets the gain for an ADC FS value in the range  
of 1 to 5 dB. This is the recommended mode of operation.  
Holdlets you override the automatic setting to manually set the  
gain.  
This field is only displayed when an average power measurement is  
selected.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
106  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Pwr Intvl  
Pwr Zero  
P w r In tvl  
This field determines the length of the data block when measuring  
average power. The data block is a time record over which correlated  
measurements are computed.  
Range: 0.25 to 5.00 ms  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
P w r Sca le  
The upper part of this field is used to select the reference level for power  
measurements (relative to the total power of the entire CDMA  
channel). The reference is the top line of the screen and defaults to  
0 dB.  
The lower part of this field is used to select the display resolution for  
the power measurement; 1, 2 or 5 dB per vertical division.  
The power scale fields are displayed in the Markermenu when the  
Maincontrols Measurementfield is set to Poweror Fast Pwr.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): marker controls menu  
P w r Zer o  
Selecting this field calibrates (zeroes) the average power meter. This  
operation should be performed immediately before making an average  
power measurement. This field is only displayed if the average power  
measurement is selected.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The Auto Zerofield causes average power to be periodically calibrated  
when set to Auto. If the Auto Zerofield is set to Manual, you must use  
the Pwr Zerofield to zero average power. (See the "Auto Zero" field on  
page 95 for more information.)  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
Chapter 4  
107  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Qual Event  
Qual Event  
Qu a l Even t  
This field selects a trigger qualifier. The trigger qualifier serves as a  
precursor to the CDMA analyzer trigger event. Selecting a trigger  
qualifier is required when a time-delayed trigger event is desired, or if  
the trigger signal is externally supplied at the TRIGGER QUALIFIER  
IN connector.  
If a time-delayed trigger is used (see the "Trig Event" field on page 112),  
the qualifier starts the delay timer. When the timer expires, a trigger  
event occurs and a measurement is made.  
Nonecauses the trigger event to be determined solely by the  
selection in the Trig Eventfield.  
27 msis an internally generated clock signal.  
20 msis an internally generated clock signal.  
80 msis an internally generated clock signal (default selection).  
2 sis an internally generated clock signal.  
Ampl Loqualifies a trigger each time the input to the CDMA  
analyzer rises above 18 dB ADC FS. ADC FSis displayed when the  
average power measurement is selected, or when adjusting the Gain  
field on the CODE DOMAIN ANALYZER screen.  
Ampl Midqualifies a trigger each time the input to the CDMA  
analyzer rises above 12 ADC FS.  
Ampl Hiqualifies a trigger each time the input to the CDMA  
analyzer rises above 6 ADC FS.  
Externalmust be selected if the trigger qualifier is provided by an  
external source. The external signal connects to the TRIGGER  
QUALIFIER IN connector. A qualifier occurs on the input signals  
rising edge.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): trigger controls menu  
108  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
RF Channel  
RF Gen Freq  
RF Channel  
The RF Channel field is displayed when the RF Displayfield on the  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Chan.  
This field displays the current channel number. Channel tuning  
eliminates the need to enter transmit and receive frequencies directly  
into the Test Set. Once the radios RF channel standard is selected, you  
only have to enter the channel number to automatically set the RF  
Generatorand RF Analyzerto the correct frequency.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
To utilize the correct transmit and receive frequencies select the  
appropriate channel standard from the RF Chan Stdfield on the  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed  
CDMA ANALYZER  
CDMA GENERATOR  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu  
R F Gen F r eq  
This field specifies the center frequency of the generated CDMA signal.  
This field is displayed only when the RF Displayfield on the  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Freq.  
NOTE  
Channel Tuning  
You can configure the Test Set to allow direct entry of  
channel numbers (instead of entering the frequency) by  
using the RF Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT  
CONFIGURE screen. See the "RF Channel" field (this  
page) for more information.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
CDMA GENERATOR  
Chapter 4  
109  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
RF In/Ant  
Threshold  
RF In /An t  
This field selects the Test Sets RF input.  
CAUTION The maximum safe level into the ANT IN connector is  
60 mW. Exceeding this level could cause permanent  
damage to the Test Set.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu  
Th r esh old  
Enter the measurement display threshold for making code domain  
timing and phase measurements. Walsh channels that have power  
levels below the threshold value are not displayed.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
Querying these measurements for Walsh channels that are below the  
threshold level using HP-IB will return a default value of 9e99.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): auxiliary controls menu  
110  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Time Offset  
TmOfs  
Tim e Offset  
This field allows you to manually enter a time offset. To obtain a value  
to enter in this field you must make at least one of the following  
measurements.  
Power  
Timing  
Phase  
Rho  
After making the measurement, access the FP Setupmenu on the  
CODE DOM screen, and enter the value obtained from the Time Ofs  
field or, for rho measurements, the Time Offsetmeasurement field on  
the CDMA ANALYZER screen.  
An entry into the Time Offsetfield can also be made automatically,  
using the Ofs Trnsferfield. See the "Ofs Trnsfer" field on page 105.  
When measuring fast power, the code domain analyzer uses the value  
in the Time Offsetfield instead of re-measuring the time offset  
parameters each time a code domain measurement is made.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): fast power setup controls menu  
Tm Ofs  
This measurement field displays the time offset when a rho  
measurement is made. See the "Time Offset" field (this page) for more  
information about this measurement.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): all menus  
Chapter 4  
111  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Trig Event  
Tune Freq  
Tr ig E ven t  
This field determines when the trigger event to the CDMA analyzer  
occurs. When the selected trigger in this field is qualified by the  
selection in the Qual Eventfield, the CDMA analyzer is triggered.  
Choices  
27 msis an internally generated clock.  
20 msis an internally generated clock.  
80 msis an internally generated clock.  
2 sis an internally generated clock.  
Delaycontrols a trigger delay timer, beginning from the positive  
edge of the selected qualifier. A delay of 20 µs to 10,000,000 µs is  
valid. Initially, the time delay will be 100 µs.  
Immedtriggers immediately after receiving the Qual Eventsignal.  
Default selection: Immed.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): trigger controls menu  
Tu n e F r eq  
Use this field to enter the center frequency of the CDMA channel you  
are analyzing. This field is displayed only when the RF Displayfield  
on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Freq.  
NOTE  
Channel tuning  
You can configure the Test Set to allow direct entry of  
channel numbers (instead of entering the frequency) by  
using the RF Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT  
CONFIGURE screen. See the "RF Channel" field on page  
109 for more information.  
Scr een s on w h ich th is field is p r esen t  
CDMA ANALYZER  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu  
112  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Walsh Chan  
Walsh Chan  
Wa lsh Ch a n  
This field selects the Walsh channel to move the marker to. The marker  
can be moved by either entering the Walsh channel number using the  
keypad, or by using the cursor-control knob.  
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t  
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): marker controls menu  
Chapter 4  
113  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Walsh Chan  
Walsh Chan  
114  
Chapter4  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
AC Level Measurement  
AM Depth Measurement  
Analog Measurements  
AC Level Measurement  
The type of measurement shown is dependent on the AF Anl In  
settings. AC Levelis displayed when the AF Anl Infield is set to SSB  
Demod, Audio In, Ext Mod, or Audio Out.  
The AC Levelmeasurement field displays either rms potential  
(voltage) or audio power (Watts or dBm).  
See "Displaying AF Measurements" on page 37, or the  
"AF Anl In" field on page 123 for more information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
AM Depth Measurement  
This measurement field displays the percent depth of modulation of the  
AM signal. This measurement is displayed when the AF Anl Infield is  
set to AM MODor AM DEMOD.  
See "Displaying AF Measurements" on page 37, or the  
"AF Anl In" field on page 123 for more information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
116  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
AF Freq Measurement  
DC Level Measurement  
AF Freq Measurement  
The AF frequency measurement is the audio frequency of the signal  
present at the input selected in the AF Anl Infield (on the AF  
ANALYZER screen). Four dashes (- - - -) indicate that no audio  
frequency is present to measure.  
See "SINAD, Distortion, SNR, AF Frequency, DC Level," on page 38 for  
more information. See also the "AF Anl In" field on page 123.  
Screens on which this measurement is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
RF ANALYZER  
DC Level Measurement  
This measurement field displays the dc voltage entering at the source  
set in the AF Anl Infield (on the AF ANALYZER screen).  
See "SINAD, Distortion, SNR, AF Frequency, DC Level," on page 38 for  
more information. See also the "AF Anl In" field on page 123.  
Operating Considerations  
When the AF Anl Infield is set to FM Demodor AM Demod, the  
unit-of-measure is kHz (for FM Demod) or % (for AM Demod). For these  
two settings this measurement indicates the dc modulation component  
of the received signal.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
RF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
117  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Distn (Distortion) Measurement  
FM Deviation Measurement  
Distn (Distortion) Measurement  
This measurement field displays the percent of distortion for an audio  
signal tone.  
See "SINAD, Distortion, SNR, AF Frequency, DC Level," on page 38 for  
more information.  
Operating Considerations  
Set the Notch Freqfield (on the AF ANALYZER screen) to match the  
AF frequency used for your distortion measurement.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALZYER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
FM Deviation Measurement  
This measurement field displays the deviation of FM signals. This  
measurement is displayed when the AF Anl Infield (on the AF  
ANALYZER screen) is set to FM Demodor FM Mod.  
See "Displaying AF Measurements" on page 37 for more information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALZYER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
118  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Frequency Measurement  
Frequency Error Measurement  
Frequency Measurement  
This measurement field displays the center frequency the signal being  
measured.  
Operating Considerations  
This measurement cannot be used for measuring CDMA signals; use  
the CDMA analyzer.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALZYER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
Frequency Error Measurement  
This measurement field displays the difference between the Test Sets  
RF channel or tune frequency setting set and measured signals  
frequency.  
You can display the frequency error in ppm by pressing the ppm W key.  
Operating Considerations  
This measurement cannot be used for measuring CDMA signals; use  
the CDMA analyzer.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALZYER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
Chapter 5  
119  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
TX Power Measurement  
TX Power Measurement  
TX Power Measurement  
Transmitter power measures RF power at the RF IN/OUT port.  
Operating Considerations  
Only the RF IN/OUT port can be used for measuring TX power. When  
the Input Portis set to Ant, four dashes (- - - -) appear in place of  
digits for this measurement.  
Use the spectrum analyzer to measure low-level RF power (60 mW) at  
the ANT IN port.  
page 157 for more information.  
CAUTION  
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN port can  
cause instrument damage (although internal protection  
circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal of  
several Watts). If the overpower circuit is triggered  
(signified by a warning message at the top of the screen),  
remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and reset using  
Meas Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key)  
or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
120  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
FM Deviation Measurement  
AF Freq (Audio Frequency) Measurement  
FM Deviation Measurement  
This is the default setting for this measurement field. The FM deviation  
measurement is the frequency deviation of the carrier. This  
measurement field is only displayed when the AF Anl Infield (on the  
AF ANALYZER screen) is set to FM Demodor FM Mod.  
See the "Displaying AF Measurements" on page 37 for more  
information. See also the "AF Anl In" field on page 123.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
AF Freq (Audio Frequency) Measurement  
The audio frequency measurement field displays the audio frequency of  
the signal at the source selected in the AF Anl Infield (on the AF  
ANALYZER screen).  
See "SINAD, Distortion, SNR, AF Frequency, DC Level," on page 38 for  
more information. See also the "AF Anl In" field on page 123.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALZYER  
RF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
Chapter 5  
121  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
SINAD Measurement  
SNR Measurement  
SINAD Measurement  
SINAD is the measure of the ratio of the signal+noise+distortion to the  
noise+distortion produced at the output of a receiver that is the result  
of a modulated signal input. This ratio is expressed in dB.  
See "SINAD, Distortion, SNR, AF Frequency, DC Level," on page 38 for  
more information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
RF ANALYZER  
SNR Measurement  
The is signal to noise ratio of the audio input signal.  
See "SINAD, Distortion, SNR, AF Frequency, DC Level," on page 38 for  
more information.  
Operating Considerations  
Selecting SNRturns off any other audio measurements.  
The RF generator and audio frequency generator 1 (AFGen1) must  
be set up to provide the radios carrier. (AFGen1is automatically  
turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement.)  
The AFGen2 Tofield on the RF GENERATOR screen must be set to  
Off.  
The audio output of the radios receiver must be connected to the  
AUDIO IN port (set the AF Anl Infield on the AF ANALYZER  
screen to Audio In).  
Screens on which this measurement is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
RF GENERATOR  
RF ANALYZER  
122  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
AF Anl In  
AF Cnt Gate  
Control Fields for Analog Measurements  
AF Anl In  
The audio frequency analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer.  
When selected, this field displays a list of choices.  
Signals can be analyzed from three different types of inputs:  
The output of the AM, FM, or SSB demodulators.  
The AUDIO IN, ANALOG MODULATION IN, and AUDIO OUT  
connectors.  
The signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF  
generator.  
Operating Considerations  
Changing this field changes the audio measurement (in the upper-right  
of the screen) to correspond to the selected signal.  
See "Selecting the Oscilloscopes Input" on page 72 for more  
information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
AF Cnt Gate  
Audio frequency counter gate specifies how long the AF counter  
samples the signal before displaying the frequency. Specifying a shorter  
gate time may enable you to see frequency fluctuations that might not  
be seen using a longer gate time.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
123  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
AFGen1 Freq  
AFGen1 To  
AFGen1 Freq  
This field sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave  
generator.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
AFGen1 To  
This field has two subfields:  
The upper field sets the destination port for audio frequency  
generator 1  
FM-RF generator FM modulator  
AM-RF generator AM modulator  
Audio Out-AUDIO OUT connector  
The lower field  
sets FM modulation deviation if the upper field set to FM  
sets AM modulation depth if the upper field set to AM  
sets the amplitude of audio signal (volts RMS) at the AUDIO  
OUT connector if upper field is set to Audio Out  
turns off the AF generator if the Yes On/Off key is pressed.  
Operating Considerations  
Simultaneous FM and AM, using both AF generators is not allowed.  
AF generators 1 and 2 are automatically turned off any time the CDMA  
screens are displayed. This prevents accidental amplitude or frequency  
modulation of the CDMA carrier. The AF generators are turned back on  
when you exit the CDMA screens (if they were previously turned on).  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
124  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
AFGen2 Freq  
AFGen2 To  
AFGen2 Freq  
This field sets the frequency for the second audio frequency sinewave  
generator.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
AFGen2 To  
This field has two subfields:  
The upper field sets the destination port for audio frequency  
generator 2  
FM-RF generator FM modulator  
AM-RF generator AM modulator  
Audio Out-AUDIO OUT connector  
The lower field  
sets FM modulation deviation if the upper field set to FM  
sets AM modulation depth if the upper field set to AM  
sets the amplitude of audio signal (volts RMS) at the AUDIO  
OUT connector if upper field is set to Audio Out  
turns off the AF generator if the Yes On/Off key is pressed.  
Operating Considerations  
Simultaneous FM and AM, using both AF generators is not allowed.  
AF generators 1 and 2 are automatically turned off any time the CDMA  
screens are displayed. This prevents accidental amplitude or frequency  
modulation of the CDMA carrier. The AF generators are turned back on  
when you exit the CDMA screens (if they were previously turned on).  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
Chapter 5  
125  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Amplitude  
Atten Hold  
Amplitude  
This field adjusts the amplitude of the RF generator.  
See for Atten Hold (below) for more information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
SPEC ANL: RF generator controls menu  
Atten Hold  
Attenuator hold prevents the fixed RF output attenuators from  
switching in and out, eliminating the loss of the output signal as the  
level is changed. This function is helpful when making squelch  
measurements.  
Operating Considerations  
When this function is set to On, the RF output level is restricted to a  
range around the present Amplitudesetting. This range varies with  
the amplitude setting. Attempting to set an amplitude outside the  
allowed range results in an error message and beep (if the beeper is on).  
RF output level accuracy is greatly degraded outside the allowed range.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
126  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Audio In Lo  
Auto/Norm  
Audio In Lo  
This field sets the AUDIO IN LO connectors state.  
Gndcauses the center pin of the connector to be connected directly to  
chassis ground.  
Floatisolates the center pin of the connector from ground,  
providing a floating input to the AF analyzer.  
600 To Hiestablishes a 600-ohm impedance between the center  
pins of the AUDIO IN LO and AUDIO IN HI connectors. Also, the  
Ext Load Rfield is removed, since the load is now fixed to 600  
ohms.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Audio Out  
Auto/Norm  
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the AF generator to  
the AUDIO OUT connector.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
This field specifies how the trigger level is set.  
Autoautomatically triggers if a triggering signal is not detected  
within approximately 50 ms of the last trigger.  
Normrequires a specific triggering signal before triggering.  
Operating Considerations  
Automatic triggering should be used for signals >20 Hz. Normal  
triggering should be used for signals 20 Hz.  
Also, when measuring 1 Hz signals, you should set the Scope Tofield  
in the AF ANALYZER screen to Inputto provide dc coupling to the  
oscilloscopes input.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: trigger controls menu  
Chapter 5  
127  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Auto Zero  
Cont/Single  
Auto Zero  
This field is displayed for average power measurements.  
Autois used to automatically zero the TX power measurement  
periodically during operation.  
Manualis used to override the Autofeature. When Manualis selected,  
you must manually zero the TX power measurement by selecting the  
TX Pwr Zerofield.  
Screens on which this field is present  
RF ANALYZER  
Center Freq  
This field sets the tune frequency for the center of the spectrum  
analyzers screen. The center frequency field is displayed when the RF  
Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to  
Freq.  
Operating Considerations  
This field also changes the center frequency of the tracking generator  
and the RF analyzer.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: main controls menu  
Controls  
The spectrum analyzer and oscilloscope settings are arranged in  
several menus that are accessed using the Controls field. A list of menu  
options is displayed when the controls field is selected.  
See the descriptions for the individual control fields on each menu for  
more information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: all menus  
SCOPE: all menus  
Cont/Single  
This field specifies whether the oscilloscope is continuously triggered  
(Cont), or if it is only triggered each time Resetis selected (Single).  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: trigger controls menu  
128  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
De-Emp Gain  
De-Emphasis  
De-Emp Gain  
De-emphasis gain displays and selects the desired AF analyzer  
de-emphasis amplifier gain.  
See the "Gain Cntl" field on page 134 for more information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
De-Emphasis  
This setting selects or bypasses the 750 µs de-emphasis networks in the  
audio analyzer and internal speaker circuitry.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
129  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Detector  
Detector  
Detector  
This setting selects the type of detector used when measuring and  
displaying AF signal levels.  
Detector Types  
RMSdisplays the root mean square (rms) value of signals.  
RMS*SQRT2 displays the rms value of a signal multiplied by 2 .  
Pk+displays the positive peak value.  
Pkdisplays the negative peak value.  
Pk±/2adds the positive and negative peak values, and divides the  
sum by 2.  
Pk±Maxcompares the positive and negative peaks and displays the  
greater value (polarity is not indicated).  
Pk+ Holddisplays and holds the positive peak value until the  
measurement is reset. To reset, use Meas Reset (press and release the  
Shift key, then the Hold key), select a different detector, or re-select the  
same detector.  
PkHolddisplays and holds the negative peak value until the  
measurement is reset. To reset, use Meas Reset (press and release the  
Shift key, then the Hold key), select a different detector, or re-select the  
same detector.  
Pk±/2 Holddivides the sum of the positive and negative peak  
values by 2, and displays the value until the measurement is reset.  
To reset, use Meas Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold  
key), select a different detector, or re-select the same detector.  
Pk±Mx Holdcompares the positive and negative peaks and displays  
the greater value until the measurement is reset. To reset, use Meas  
Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key), select a  
different detector, or re-select the same detector.  
HP-IB Example  
Operating Considerations  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
130  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Ext Load R  
Filter 1  
Ext Load R  
External load resistance is used to calculate and display AF power.  
Power is calculated using the voltage measured at the AUDIO IN  
connections and the resistance value you enter into this field.  
This field is displayed only when the Audio Infield on the AF  
ANALYZER screen is set to GNDor Float.  
Operating Considerations  
To display audio power, set the AC Levelmeasurements unit of  
measure to W(watts).  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Filter 1  
This field selects an audio frequency filter which can be used to  
condition the audio signal before it is analyzed by the audio frequency  
analyzer.  
The following filter choices are available:  
<20 Hz HPF  
50 Hz HPF  
300Hz HPF  
C MESSAGE  
Operating Considerations  
The audio from the Test Sets speaker is not affected by Filter 1 or  
Filter 2 settings.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
131  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Filter 2  
Filter 2  
Filter 2  
This field selects an audio frequency filter which can be used to  
condition the audio signal before it is analyzed by the audio frequency  
analyzer.  
The following filter choices are available:  
300Hz LPF  
3kHz LPF  
15kHz LPF  
>99kHz LP  
6kHz BPF  
Operating Considerations  
The audio from the Test Sets speaker is not affected by Filter 1 or  
Filter 2 settings.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
132  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
FM Coupling  
Freq (marker)  
FM Coupling  
This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and  
external modulation sources. This field also selects ac or dc coupling  
between the RF generators frequency modulator and the ANALOG  
MODULATION IN connector.  
Operating Considerations  
This field should be set to DCwhenever the AFGen2 Tofield is set to FM;  
this provides better modulation response at low data rates.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
Freq (marker)  
Marker frequency displays the frequency at the markers present  
position on the spectrum analyzer.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: all control menus  
F igu r e 5-1 F r eq a n d Lvl Disp la y F ield s  
Chapter 5  
133  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Gain Cntl  
Gain Cntl  
Gain Cntl  
AF analyzer gain control specifies whether the AF analyzers gain  
settings are controlled automatically by AF autoranging (Auto), or by  
manual control (Hold).  
The following settings are affected by AF autoranging:  
Input Gain  
De-Emp Gain  
Notch Gain  
Operating Considerations  
The normal mode of operation for the Gain Cntlfield is Auto,  
allowing the instrument to adjust the AF gain settings for optimum  
measurement accuracy.  
This field can be set to Holdto disable the autoranging routines to  
increase measurement speed. However, this requires you to select the  
desired gain settings manually for each measurement.  
Autoranging Interference. After a signal is input, the RF autoranging  
function (Auto) takes a small amount of time to determine the required  
input attenuator setting. If your transmitter begins sending  
information the instant it transmits, the initial part of the demodulated  
signal may not appear on the oscilloscope. When trying to capture the  
initial modulation waveform of a signal on the oscilloscope, set the  
upper field to Holdand set the lower field to an appropriate level for  
the signal being decoded (start with 40 dB).  
Setting the upper field to Holdalso prevents the RF autoranging  
process from interrupting spectrum analyzer operation when a signal is  
first measured. This can be helpful when you need to see the signal the  
instant the source is input, but requires you to set the needed amount of  
input attenuation.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
134  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
IF Filter  
Input Atten  
IF Filter  
This field selects the desired IF filter bandwidth for modulated signals  
being analyzed.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
Input Atten  
Input attenuation sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF  
IN/OUT and ANT IN connectors. This function controls two settings:  
The upper field determines if you want the instrument to set the  
attenuation automatically (Auto), or if you want to set the value  
manually (Hold).  
The lower field displays the present attenuation value, and is used to  
set the desired attenuation level when the upper area is set to Hold.  
Operating Considerations  
Autoranging Interference. After a signal is input, the RF autoranging  
function (Auto) takes a small amount of time to determine the required  
input attenuator setting. If your transmitter begins sending  
information the instant it transmits, the initial part of the demodulated  
signal may not appear on the oscilloscope. When trying to capture the  
initial modulation waveform of a signal on the oscilloscope, set the  
upper field to Holdand set the lower field to an appropriate level for  
the signal being decoded (start with 40 dB).  
Setting the upper field to Holdalso prevents the RF autoranging  
process from interrupting spectrum analyzer operation when a signal is  
first measured. This can be helpful when you need to see the signal the  
instant the source is input, but requires you to set the needed amount of  
input attenuation.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
SPEC ANL: auxiliary controls menu  
Chapter 5  
135  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Input Gain  
Input Port  
Input Gain  
This field displays and selects the gain of the AF analyzers input  
amplifier. The choices are 0 dB, 20 dB, or 40 dB. Refer to the Gain  
Cntlfield more information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALZYER  
Input Port  
This field selects the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN port for making RF  
measurements. The RF IN/OUT port must be used for making TX  
power measurements.  
Operating Considerations  
If the RF power at the RF IN/OUT port exceeds allowable limits, a loud  
warning signal sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen.  
If this occurs, disconnect the RF power, reset using Meas Reset (press and  
release the Shift key, then the Hold key), and allow the Test Set to cool off  
for approximately two minutes before making any other measurements  
on this port.  
The ANT IN (antenna input) connector provides a highly-sensitive  
input for very low level signals (such as off the air” measurements).  
You cannot measure TX (RF) power on the RF ANALYZER screen  
using the ANT IN port.  
CAUTION  
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN port can  
cause instrument damage (although internal protection  
circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal of  
several Watts).  
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a  
warning message at the top of the screen), remove the  
signal from the ANT IN port, and reset using Meas Reset  
(press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key) or turn  
the Test Set off and on.  
Maximum signal levels at the RF IN/OUT, DUPLEX OUT,  
and ANT IN ports are printed on the connector panel.  
Exceeding these levels can cause permanent instrument  
damage.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: RF IN/ANT main controls menu  
RF ANALYZER  
136  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Internal  
Level (div)  
Internal  
This field selects the trigger source.  
Internaluses the signal being displayed for triggering.  
Ext (TTL)uses the EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT for triggering.  
This is a TTL level trigger (approximately 2.5 V).  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: trigger controls menu  
Level (div)  
This control is divided into two fields:  
The upper field (0.00) sets the internal trigger level as a function of  
vertical divisions. The trigger level is indicated by small pointers that  
appear on each side of the screen (only used for internal triggering).  
The lower field (Pos/Neg) specifies whether triggering happens when  
the waveform being measured is positive-going (Pos), or negative-going  
(Neg).  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: trigger controls menu  
Chapter 5  
137  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Lvl (marker)  
Lvl (marker)  
Lvl (marker)  
This measurement field displays the signal level of the signal at the  
current marker position on the spectrum analyzer. (See Figure 5-1 on  
Operating Considerations  
The unit-of-measure for this field is dependent on the source of the  
signal being measured. For instance, when measuring a signal from the  
AUDIO IN connector, the amplitude is measured in Volts. When  
looking at a signal from the FM demodulator, the amplitude is given in  
units of kHz.  
When the Vert Offsetfield is 0.00, the displayed marker level is  
referenced to the center line generated by the vertical offset feature, not  
the center line of the screen.  
The Ref Set function can be used with this measurement to display levels  
relative to a specific value. (See "Setting A Measurement Reference" on  
page 45.)  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: all control menus  
SPEC ANL: all control menus  
138  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Marker To Peak+  
Marker To (spectrum analyzer)  
Marker To Peak+  
Peak+causes the marker to move to the maximum value of the a verage  
level measured on the display.  
Because this functions look at the average value for each displayed  
pixel, the marker may not appear directly on the displayed peak of a  
noisy signal.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: marker controls menu  
Marker To Peak-  
Peakcauses the marker to move to the minimum value of the average  
level measured on the display.  
Because this functions look at the average value for each displayed  
pixel, the marker may not appear directly on the displayed peak of a  
noisy signal.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: marker controls menu  
Marker To (spectrum analyzer)  
These two fields position the marker as follows.  
Peakmoves the marker to the highest peak and enters the location  
in the Positionfield.  
Next Peakmoves the marker to the next peak to the right and  
enters the location in the Positionfield.  
Center Freqchanges the center frequency value to match the  
current position of the marker.  
Ref Levelchanges the reference level setting to match the current  
position of the marker.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: marker controls menu  
Chapter 5  
139  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Mod In To  
No Pk/Avg  
Mod In To  
This modulation input field defines how an external modulation source  
is used with the RF generator. Two fields are used:  
The upper field determines whether the ANALOG MODULATION  
IN signal is set for AM or FM modulation of the RF GENERATOR.  
The lower field sets the modulation sensitivity. For instance, if FM  
(/Vpk)is selected for the upper field, and you set the lower field to  
1.0000 kHz, the RF generator will deviate 1 kHz for every 1 Volt  
peak at the ANALOG MODULATION IN connector.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
No Pk/Avg  
This field performs two functions:  
Pk Hold (peak hold) prevents the spectrum analyzer from erasing the  
previous trace each time it sweeps. This causes the traces to build-up’  
on the screen until Off, No Pk/Avgor measurement reset (using Meas  
Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key) is performed.  
This allows the capture of transient signals that are not displayed long  
enough to view during normal operation.  
Avg 1through 100(video averaging) enables the spectrum analyzer to  
display a trace representing the average of several measurements. The  
number of samples used for measurement averaging range from 1 to  
100 (see below). No Pk/Avgand Offfunction identically. Offis  
provided to maintain backwards compatibility with earlier firmware  
and software.  
No Pk/Avgmeans that peak hold and video averaging are off.  
Pk Holdmeans that peak hold is on.  
Avg [n]enables video averaging over [n] measurements,  
where n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 50, or 100  
Offmeans that peak hold and video averaging are off.  
Operating Considerations  
After capturing the desired signal, you can use the hold function (press  
Hold key) to prevent additional signals from building-up on the display.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: auxiliary controls menu  
140  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Normalize  
Notch Freq  
Normalize  
This area performs three display operations:  
Save Bsaves the currently-displayed trace for the A-B operation.  
A onlyprovides a continuously-updated display (the normalmode  
of operation).  
A-Bdisplays the difference between the trace saved using Save B  
and the currently displayed trace. The comparison can yield either  
losses or gains in amplitude.  
Operating Considerations  
The A-B function works correctly only if the center frequency and span  
settings are the same for both signals.  
The reference level (Ref Level) can be changed (on the Maincontrols  
menu) to move the trace below the top line of the display if the A-B  
function results in a gain.  
The Hold key can be used to freeze” the display at any time. This allows  
you to view a trace before performing the Save B or A-B functions.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: auxiliary controls menu  
Notch Freq  
This field sets the center frequency for the variable frequency notch  
filter. It is typically used for distortion and SINAD measurements at  
frequencies below or above the standard 1 kHz notch filter.  
Operating Considerations  
When the Notch Couplfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
screen is set to AFGen1, this filter and the AFGen1 Freqfield match  
their settings. A warning message is then displayed if you attempt to  
set the AFGen1 Freqvalue outside the 300 Hz to 10 kHz range of this  
filter. When the Notch Couplfield is set to None, this filter and  
AFGen1 Freqoperate independently.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
141  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Notch Gain  
Offset Freq  
Notch Gain  
This field displays and selects the gain of the AF analyzers notch filter  
amplifier. This amplifier is only used for making SINAD and distortion  
measurements. (See the "Gain Cntl" field on page 134 for more  
information.)  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Offset Freq  
Frequency offset (RF generator) sets the difference between the  
instantaneous frequencies of the tracking generator and the center  
frequency of the spectrum analyzer.  
This field is displayed only when Trackis selected in the Track/Fixed  
field on the RF Gencontrols menu.  
Operating Considerations  
The offset can be a positive or negative value. When set to zero, the  
tracking generator produces a sweeping signal that matches the  
spectrum analyzers tune frequency.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: RF generator controls menu  
142  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Output Port  
Pk Det To  
Output Port  
This field selects the RF generators output port. Higher RF generator  
levels are available at the DUPLEX OUT port than at the RF IN/OUT  
port.  
Operating Considerations  
CAUTION  
Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT  
connector can damage the instrument. (A message is  
displayed when an overpower conditions occurs.)  
Whenever possible, use the RF IN/OUT connector when  
testing transceivers to prevent damage from accidental  
transmitter keying.  
If a reverse-power condition triggers the internal  
protection circuit, remove the reverse-power signal and  
reset using Meas Reset (press and release the Shift key, then  
the Hold key) or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.  
Maximum signal levels at the RF IN/OUT, DUPLEX OUT,  
and ANT IN ports are printed on the connector panel.  
Exceeding these levels can cause permanent instrument  
damage.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF GENERATOR  
SPEC ANL: (Fixed) RF generator controls menu  
Pk Det To  
This field selects the signal source for the peak detectors. This allows  
you to bypass certain sections of the AF analyzers circuitry when  
making ac-level measurements.  
Filtersanalyzes the signal after filtering through Filter 1.  
De-Empanalyzes the signal after filtering through Filter 1 and  
Filter 2, and after de-emphasis.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
143  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Port/Sweep  
Port/Sweep  
Port/Sweep  
This control performs two functions:  
The upper field specifies the output port of the tracking generator.  
The lower field specifies whether the tracking generator sweeps from  
low-to-high frequencies (Norm), or from high-to-low frequencies  
(Invert). (The spectrum analyzer always sweeps from low to high  
frequencies.) The swept frequency range is determined by the Span  
setting in the spectrum analyzers main controls menu.  
This field is displayed only when Trackis selected in the Track/Fixed  
field on the spectrum analyzers RF Gencontrols menu.  
Operating Considerations  
When using the tracking generator, if the output port is set to RF Out,  
or the main menu Input Portis set to RF In, internal instrument  
coupling can occur. For the best isolation between the tracking  
generator and the spectrum analyzer, use Duplfor the output, and Ant  
for the input.  
For measurements on high-power devices, such as amplifiers, use the  
RF IN/OUT port for the input.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: RF generator controls menu  
144  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Position  
Position  
Position  
This field indicates the number of scale divisions from the left side of  
the screen to the marker.  
Use the DATA ENTRY keys or cursor-control knob to move the marker  
to any point on the displayed signal.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: marker controls menu  
SPEC ANL: marker controls menu  
Chapter 5  
145  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Ref Level  
Reset  
Ref Level  
Reference level sets the amplitude reference level for the top line of the  
display. All signals displayed are referenced to this line.  
Operating Considerations  
The unit-of-measure for the reference can be changed as needed. For  
instance, 0 dBm, 0.224 V, 107.0 dBmV, and 0.00100 W can all be used  
to represent the same level.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: main controls menu  
Reset  
Reset retriggers the measurement when Singletriggering is selected.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: trigger controls menu  
146  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
RF Channel  
RF Cnt Gate  
RF Channel  
The RF Channel field is displayed on the screens listed below when the  
RF Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to  
Chan.  
This field displays the current channel number. Channel tuning  
eliminates the need to set transmit and receive frequencies directly into  
the Test Set. Once the radios RF channel standard is selected, you only  
have to enter the channel number to automatically set the RF  
Generatorand RF Analyzerto the correct frequency.  
Operating Considerations  
To utilize the correct transmit and receive frequencies select the  
appropriate channel standard from the RF Chan Stdfield on the  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.  
The lower subfield of the RF Channelfield on the spectrum analyzers  
RF Gencontrols menu also sets the RF channel standard.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
SPEC ANL: RF generator or main controls menu  
RF Cnt Gate  
RF counter gate specifies how long the RF counter samples the signal  
before displaying the frequency. Specifying a shorter gate time may  
enable you to see frequency fluctuations that might not be seen using a  
longer gate time.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
147  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
RF Gen Freq  
RF In/Ant  
RF Gen Freq  
This field sets the RF generators frequency.  
This field is displayed on the screens listed below when the RF  
Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to  
Freq.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL (When the Controls field is set to RF Gen)  
RF GENERATOR  
RF In/Ant  
This field selects the input port for the spectrum analyzer.  
Operating Considerations  
Maximum signal levels are printed on the connector panel.  
CAUTION  
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN port can  
cause instrument damage (although internal protection  
circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal of  
several Watts).  
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a  
warning message at the top of the screen), remove the  
signal from the ANT IN port, and reset using Meas Reset  
(press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key) or turn  
the Test Set off and on to reset it.  
Using the ANT IN port with the Sensitivityfield set to Highcan  
result in uncalibrated operation (a message appears on the screen when  
this happens). The purpose for the high sensitivity setting is to allow  
you to look and listen to very low level signals when absolute accuracy  
is not essential.  
information.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL  
148  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Scope To  
Scope To  
Scope To  
This field selects the signal source for the oscilloscope. This allows you  
to bypass certain sections of the AF analyzers circuitry when viewing  
and measuring a signal. It also allows you to select measurement paths  
that include additional gain stages, improving the oscilloscopes  
resolution when measuring low-level signals.  
Inputlooks at the unfiltered signal directly from the input.  
Filterslooks at the signal after filtering through Filter 1 and  
Filter 2.  
De-Emplooks at the signal after filtering through Filter 1 and  
Filter 2, and after 750 µs de-emphasis (if the De-emphasisfield is  
set to 750 us.)  
Notchlooks at the signal after filtering through Filter 1 and Filter  
2, after de-emphasis (if used), and after the notch filter.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
149  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Sensitivity (RF analyzer)  
Sensitivity (spectrum analyzer)  
Sensitivity (RF analyzer)  
RF analyzer sensitivity adds about 6 dB of sensitivity for the ANT IN  
port when Highis selected and the Input Attenfield is set to 0 dB.  
Operating Considerations  
Selecting Highsensitivity may cause spectrum analyzer measurements  
to be uncalibrated when the ANT IN port is used (a message appears  
when this occurs).  
High-level AM measurements may be distorted when high sensitivity is  
used with the ANT IN port.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
Sensitivity (spectrum analyzer)  
This area performs two functions:  
The lower field selects the vertical resolution of the display. You can  
choose from 1 dB, 2 dB, or 10 dB per graticule.  
The upper field selects Normalor Highsensitivity for the RF input.  
The Highsetting adds about 6 dB of sensitivity to the ANT IN port  
(when the Input Attenfield is set to 0 dB) for looking at very low  
level signals. However, this setting can cause measurements to be  
uncalibrated (indicated by a message on the screen). High  
sensitivity can also cause high-level AM signals to be distorted.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: auxiliary controls menu  
150  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Settling  
Span  
Settling  
This field selects the settling time for making AF measurements. Lower  
frequency signals require additional settling time (Slow). Higher  
frequency measurements require less settling time (Fast).  
Operating Considerations  
Use Slowfor 200 Hz signals. Use Fastfor >200 Hz signals.  
If the signal being measured is a composite of different frequencies  
above and below 200 Hz, select the appropriate filtering to analyze the  
desired signal component.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALZYER  
Span  
Sets the span of frequencies to be displayed on the screen.  
Operating Considerations  
When the tracking generator is used, the span also defines the  
frequency sweep range.  
Spans >1.5 MHz disable the AF analyzer when the analyzers AF Anl  
Infield is set to FM Demod, AM Demod, or SSB Demod. This disables all  
the AF analyzers measurement and output functions. When the AF  
analyzers AF Anl Infield is set to any of the other available inputs,  
such as Audio Inor Ext Mod, the speaker and SCOPE MONITOR  
OUTPUT are not affected when the spectrum analyzers span is  
changed.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: main controls menu  
Chapter 5  
151  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Speaker ALC  
Speaker Vol  
Speaker ALC  
Speaker automatic level control enables/disables the ALC function for  
the instruments internal speaker. When Onis selected, the speaker  
volume is independent of the signal level being measured. When Offis  
selected, the speaker volume is dependent on the signal level being  
measured.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
Speaker Vol  
Speaker Volume enables/disables the instruments internal speaker.  
When Potis selected, the VOLUME control knob operates normally.  
When Offis selected, the speaker is disconnected.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
AF ANALYZER  
152  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Squelch  
Squelch  
Squelch  
This setting determines the squelch operation when demodulating FM,  
AM, or SSB signals. Three settings are available:  
Potuses the front-panel SQUELCH knob for squelch level  
adjustment.  
Opendisables squelch operation.  
Fixedsets the squelch to a fixed level, disabling the front-panel  
SQUELCH knob control.  
Operating Considerations  
Most measurements are not displayed on the screen if the incoming  
signal falls below the squelch level (with the exception of TX Power).  
The measurements are replaced by four dashes (- - - -) to indicate they  
have been squelched.  
Oscilloscope measurements are also disabled when the signal has been  
squelched.  
Spectrum analyzer measurements are not affected by the squelch  
setting (although squelch still affects whether the demodulated signal  
can be heard while viewing the RF signal).  
Trying to read a squelched measurement using HP-IB will cause your  
program to halt until the squelch is either turned down, a measurement  
is made, or until a program time-out aborts the measurement.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
153  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Time  
Track/Fixed  
Time  
This measurement displays the time elapsed from the trigger point to  
the current marker position.  
The Ref Set function can be used with this measurement to display time  
relative to a specific position. (See "Setting A Measurement Reference"  
on page 45.)  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: all control menus  
Time/div  
This field selects the horizontal sweep time per division.  
Operating Considerations  
The time-per-division is selected from a list of choices.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: main controls menu  
Track/Fixed  
When this field is set to Track, the tracking generator is enabled. The  
tracking generator performs a frequency sweep operation. The start  
and stop frequencies are determined by the Span setting (main controls  
menu). The tracking generator allows you to characterize devices (such  
as filter networks) over wide span of frequencies.  
An RF offset can be set between the tracking generator and the center  
frequency of the spectrum analyzer. This allows you to look at a signal  
that is related to a source whose frequency is outside the displayed  
span.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SPEC ANL: RF generator controls menu  
154  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Trig-Delay  
Trig-Delay  
Trig-Delay  
The trigger delay is used to specify the time relationship between the  
trigger and displayed signal.  
Positivevalues delay the measurement trigger by a specific  
period. The delayed trigger point is the left edge of the screen.  
Negativevalues perform a pre-trigger function, displaying a  
section of the waveform before the trigger point. The trigger point is  
indicated by small pointers that appear at the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
Operating Considerations  
Negative Value. The maximum negative delay cannot exceed ten  
divisions of the current time-per-division setting. For example; if the  
Time/Divfield is set to 1 ms, the maximum allowed negative delay is  
10 ms. Larger negative numbers cause an Excessive negative  
Trig-Delay will be truncated.message.  
Positive Values. For Time/Divsettings of 50 ms/div and smaller, the  
maximum delay is 400 ms.  
For Time/Divsettings of 100 ms/div and larger, the maximum delay is  
3200 ms.  
Resolution. For delays of 400 ms and less, the resolution is 6.4 ms. For  
delays greater than 400 ms, the resolution is 51.2 ms. All entries are  
rounded to the nearest multiple of 6.4 ms or 51.2 ms (depending on the  
delay value).  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: trigger controls menu  
Chapter 5  
155  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Tune Freq  
TX Pwr Meas  
Tune Freq  
This field is displayed when the RF Displayfield on the  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Freq.  
RF analyzer tune frequency sets the center frequency for the RF signal  
to be analyzed.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
TX Pwr Meas  
The transmitter power measurement field specifies how transmitter  
power measurements are made:  
Peakcan be used to measure AM, FM, and un-modulated (CW)  
signals.  
Samplecan be used to measure FM or CW signals with increased  
measurement speed. This method can only be used with signals  
having no amplitude modulation component.  
Operating Considerations  
If you change this field, zero the power measurement (using the TX Pwr  
Zerofield) before measuring power.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
156  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
TX Pwr Zero  
TX Pwr Zero  
TX Pwr Zero  
The transmitter power zero function establishes a 0.0000 W reference  
for measuring RF power at the RF IN/OUT port.  
Operating Considerations  
When power is applied to the RF IN/OUT connector, the temperature of  
the internal circuitry increases. This can cause changes in the TX  
power measurement when low power levels are measured immediately  
following high power measurements.  
When alternately making high and low power measurements, always  
zero the power meter immediately before making the low power  
measurements; this provides the best measurement accuracy.  
If the Auto Zerofield is set to Auto, the TX power measurement is  
periodically zeroed (automatically). Manual calibration is only needed if  
Auto Zerois set to Manual, or if you are measuring highly variable  
signal levels (as mentioned above).  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
RF ANALYZER  
Chapter 5  
157  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields  
Vert/div  
Vert Offset  
Vert/div  
Vertical sensitivity sets the vertical amplitude per division.  
Operating Considerations  
The value for this field is selected from a list of choices.  
Depending on the AF analyzers AF Anl Insetting, the units for this  
field may be in Volts, kHz, or Percent (AM). For example; if the AF Anl  
Infield is set to FM Demod, the amplitude is displayed in kHz/div.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: main controls menu  
Vert Offset  
Vertical offset moves the displayed signal above or below the  
oscilloscopes fixed centerline.  
Operating Considerations  
A centerline is displayed for the signal when an offset is used.  
When the vertical offset is 0.00, the marker level is referenced to the  
center line generated by the vertical offset feature, not the center line of  
the screen.  
Screens on which this field is displayed  
SCOPE: main controls menu  
158  
Chapter5  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Setting the Date and Time  
Turning Off User Messages  
Con figu r in g th e In st r u m en t  
Set t in g t h e Da t e a n d Tim e  
The Test Set has a built-in clock that keeps track of the date and time.  
It is powered by an internal battery to keep it operating when the  
instrument is off.  
To set the date and time  
Step 1. Access the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.  
Step 2. Select the Datefield and use the DATA ENTRY keys to enter  
the date (MMDDYY -- October 31, 1997 = 103197).  
Step 3. Select the Timefield and use the DATA ENTRY keys to enter  
the time (HH.MM -- 2:13 pm = 14.13).  
Ch a n gin g th e Beep er s Volu m e  
The beeper alerts you to important operating and measurement  
conditions. It beeps any time a message is displayed at the top of the  
screen. These messages warn you of conditions such as exceeding the  
RF input level or trying to set a field to an unacceptable value.  
Therefore, it is recommended that you do not disable the beeper.  
To change the beeper’s volume  
Step 1. Access the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.  
Step 2. Select the Beeperfield to display the volume choices.  
Step 3. Select the desired choice.  
Tu r n in g Off User Messa ges  
To turn off user messages  
Step 1. Access the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.  
Step 2. Set the Display User Mssgsfield to No.  
To display user messages  
Step 1. Access the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.  
Step 2. Set the Display User Mssgsfield to Yes.  
160  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Printing a Screen  
Printing a Screen  
Con figu r in g for P r in tin g A Scr een  
P r in t in g a Scr een  
To Print A Screen’s Contents  
St ep 1. Connect a printer to the appropriate connector (SERIAL 9,  
PARALLEL 15, HP-IB).  
St ep 2. Go to the PRINTER CONFIGURE screen set the Printer  
Port:field to the appropriate type of printer connection.  
If HP-IB is selected, enter the HP-IB address (Printer Adrs)  
of the printer.  
St ep 3. Select the type of printer you are using in the Modelfield. If  
your printer is not listed, configure your printer to emulate  
one that is listed. (Some Windows1-only printers are not  
supported.)  
St ep 4. Enter a Print Titleif desired. This text will appear at the  
top of your printout.  
a . Use the knob to select letters, numbers, or symbols from  
the list (up to 50 characters).  
b . Select Donefrom the list when you have finished the title.  
St ep 5. Display the screen you want to print and press Print.  
To interrupt printing  
St ep 1. Go to the PRINTER CONFIGURE screen.  
St ep 2. Select the Abort Printfield.  
1. Windows is a U.S. trademark of Microsoft Corp.  
Chapter 6  
161  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Abort Print  
Antenna In  
Con tr ol F ield s on t h e Con figu r a t ion Scr een s  
Ab or t P r in t  
Select this field to interrupt the printing job in progress.  
Abort Print is not directly programmable over the HP-IB.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
PRINTER CONFIGURE  
An t en n a In  
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the ANT IN port  
and the device-under-test.  
Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier). The  
spectrum analyzers marker level (Lvl) measurement is automatically  
reduced by that amount. The spectrum analyzers Ref Levelis  
automatically decreased by the same amount, so the trace position does  
not appear to change.  
Enter a negative value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The  
spectrum analyzer markers level (Lvl) measurement is automatically  
increased by that amount. The spectrum analyzers Ref Levelis  
automatically increased by the same amount, so the trace position does  
not appear to change.  
This field is only used when the RF Level Offsetfield is set to On.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
162  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Base Freq (User Defined)  
Base Freq (User Defined)  
Ba se F r eq (User Defin ed )  
The base frequency field sets the RF generator reference for channel 0  
(zero) when the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF, and the RF  
Displayfield is set to Chan.  
Channel frequencies are calculated using the following formula:  
Channel N = Base Frequency + (N)(Channel Spacing)  
The Base Frequency is calculated using the following formula:  
Base Frequency = Channel 1 Frequency Channel Spacing  
For example, if your multi-channel radios lowest receive channel  
frequency is 870.030 MHz and the system channel spacing is 30 kHz,  
you would enter 870 MHzin this field. You would also use the Chan  
Spaceand (Gen)-(Anl)fields to tell the Test Set where other  
transmit and receive channel frequencies are in relation to the base  
frequency, and whether or not the system is duplex.  
For more information see the following related topics:  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The value of this field is only used if the RF Displayfield is set to  
Chan, and the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
163  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Beeper  
Chan Space (User Defined)  
Beep er  
This field changes the audio beeper volume by selecting the desired  
level from a list of choices (Off, Quiet, Loud). The beeper always beeps  
when the instrument is turned on, regardless of this setting.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
The beeper alerts you any time a message is displayed. Since a message  
may be removed from the screen before you notice it, it is better to leave  
the beeper on to alert you to errors during operation.  
The beepers volume setting is retained when the instrument is turned  
off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Ch a n Sp a ce (User Defin ed )  
This field specifies the RF channel spacing when the RF Displayfield  
is set to Chan, and the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF.  
For example, entering 25 kHzcauses a 25 kHz spacing between each  
channel. If the receive frequency for channel 1 is 150.500 MHz, channel  
2s receive frequency would be 150.525 MHz.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
The value of this field is only used if the RF Displayfield is set to  
Chan, and the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF.  
For more information see the following related topics:  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
164  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Data Length  
Display User Messages  
Da t a Len gt h  
This field specifies the number of bits used for each word of serial data  
when using the serial port.  
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
Da t e  
This field specifies the current date for the internal clock. The date can  
be read by a controller using HP-IB and printed on test results.  
The format is MMDDYY (Month Day Year), using two digits for each  
term. When entering months J anuary through September (01-09), the  
leading zero is not displayed when entered. Example; May 5, 1993 is  
entered as 050593, but is displayed as 50593.  
The internal clock still functions when the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Disp la y User Messa ges  
This field controls whether or not user messages and prompts are  
displayed at the top of the screen when a user action is required or an  
error occurs.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
165  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Duplex Out  
Ext Ref In  
Du p lex Ou t  
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the DUPLEX OUT  
port and the device-under-test.  
Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier gain).  
The RF generators level is automatically set that amount below  
what is indicated in the RF generators Amplitudefield. (Example;  
if this value is 10 dB, and the Amplitudefield shows 0 dBm, the  
actual level out this port is 10 dBm.) The value at the output of the  
external amplifier should then be at the level indicated in the  
Amplitudefield.  
Enter a negative value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The RF  
generators level is automatically set that amount above what is  
indicated in the RF generators Amplitudefield to compensate. The  
value at the opposite end of the cable (loss) should then be at the  
level indicated in the Amplitudefield; unless the resulting RF  
generator setting exceeds the maximum output level, then an error  
occurs: Input value out of range. In that case, reduce the  
Amplitudesetting, or decrease the Duplex Outvalue.  
This field is only used when the RF Level Offsetfield is set to On.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Ext Ref In  
This field selects the reference frequency of the signal at the EXT REF  
IN connector. You can select 1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz; 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, or 16x  
chip.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
This signal is used as a reference for, and directly affects, these  
functions:  
RF Generator Frequency (including the Tracking Generator)  
RF Frequency Counter  
AF Frequency Counter  
RF Analyzer Tune Frequency  
Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency  
AF generators 1 and 2 are not affected by the external reference; they  
use their own reference.  
See "EXT REF IN" on page 189 for more information.  
166  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
FF at End:  
Firmware  
F F a t E n d :  
This field is used to specify if you want the printer to make a form feed  
(blank page) at the end of printing.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
PRINTER CONFIGURE  
F F a t St a r t :  
This field is used to specify if you want the printer to make a form feed  
(blank page) at the start of printing.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
PRINTER CONFIGURE  
F ir m w a r e  
This field displays the current firmware revision for your Test Set. The  
revision number is automatically changed when updated firmware is  
installed.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
167  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Flow Control  
Flow Control  
F low Con t r ol  
The flow control field is used when sending or receiving serial data.  
Nonedisables the Xon/Xoff function.  
Xon/Xofflets the Test Set talk/listen” to the transceiver to alter  
the rate of the data being sent.  
Hardwareuses the serial ports RTS and CTS lines to transfer data  
at high baud rates.  
NOTE  
Do not turn flow control on (set Flow Cntl to Hardware  
in the I/O CONFIGURE screen) for the serial port until  
you have a device attached to the port that can respond to  
the flow control communications.  
Example: You have a printer attached to SERIAL PORT 9.  
Before you run any IBASIC software (for example, the  
RFTOOLS program), you must make sure that the printer  
is properly connected and that its power is turned on.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.  
Baud rates of 38400 and above must use Hardwareflow control.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
168  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Frame Clock Output  
(Gen)-(Anl) (User Defined)  
F r a m e Clock Ou tp u t  
This field selects the frame clock signal to send to the FRAME CLOCK  
OUT connector.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
(Gen )-(An l)  
This field is used with the RF Offsetfield to specify the amount of  
frequency offset between the RF generator and RF analyzer.  
This field is always displayed when the RF Displayfield is set to  
Freq.  
See "Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset" on page 47 for more  
information.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
(Gen )-(An l) (User Defin ed )  
This field defines the receiver-transmitter frequency offset when using  
user-defined channel operation.  
Use a positive value (such as 45 MHz) when the radios receive  
frequency is higher than the transmit frequency.  
Use a nega tive value (such as 45 MHz) when the radios receive  
frequency is lower than the transmit frequency.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The value of this field is only used if the RF Displayfield is set to  
Chan, and the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF.  
For more information see the following related topics:  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
169  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
HP-IB Adrs  
Inst Echo  
HP -IB Ad r s  
This field is used to display and change the HP-IB address of the Test  
Set.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
The address can be set from 0 to 30 by using the DATA keys, or by  
pushing and then turning the cursor-control knob.  
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
IBASIC E ch o  
This field enables/disables screen and error message echoing from  
IBASIC.  
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
In st E ch o  
This field enables/disables character and screen echoing when using an  
external ASCII RS-232 terminal or computer to enter or edit IBASIC  
programs.  
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
170  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Lines/Page:  
Notch Coupl  
Lin es/P a ge:  
This field is used to specify how many lines are printed per page.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
PRINTER CONFIGURE  
Mod e  
This field sets the HP-IB operating mode. Talk&Lstnis used for  
normal HP-IB operation. Controlis used to control external  
instruments using the Test Set.  
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
Mod el:  
This field is used to specify the type of printer used. If your printer is  
not listed in the Choicesmenu when you select this field, configure  
your printer to emulate one of those that is listed. (Some Windows-only  
printers are not supported.)  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
PRINTER CONFIGURE  
Not ch Cou p l  
This field selects if the Notch Freqsetting of the AF ANALYZER  
screen is coupled to the AF Gen1 Freqsetting. When set to None, the  
notch filter and AF generator 1 do not interact. When set to AFGen1  
(coupled), the settings track each other unless the AF generators  
frequency is set outside the 300 Hz to 10 kHz limits of the notch filter.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
171  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Opt CDMA TB  
Print Title:  
Op t CDMA TB  
This control is provided for future enhancements. It must be set to  
Internaluntil options are available.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
P a r ity  
This field specifies the serial communication parity setting when using  
the serial ports.  
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
P r in ter P or t:  
This field is used to select the port your printer is connected to  
(Parallel 15, Serial 9, HP-IB).  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
PRINTER CONFIGURE  
P r in t Tit le:  
This field is used to enter up to 50 characters to be displayed at the top  
of the printout.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
PRINTER CONFIGURE  
172  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Range Hold  
Range Hold  
R a n ge Hold  
These fields enable/disable several autoranging and autotuning  
routines.  
Auto Allenables these routines, providing automatic adjustment  
when making AF or RF measurements.  
Hold Alldisables these routines, requiring you to manually set the  
affected settings.  
The following fields are affected by the Range Holdfield:  
Input Attenin the RF ANALYZER and SPEC ANL screens.  
Gain Cntlin the AF ANALYZER screen. This field controls three  
AF gain setting fields:  
Input Gain  
De-Emp Gain  
Notch Gain  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The Hold Allsetting is primarily used when the instrument is  
operated by remote control, such as in an automated test system.  
Unless you have very specific reasons for disabling the automatic  
functions, you should set this field to Auto Allwhen operating the  
instrument manually.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
173  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Ref Select  
Ref Select  
Ref Select  
This field selects the timebase reference signal to use for generating  
and analyzing signals.  
Autoautomatically selects an external reference if a signal of  
sufficient level is detected at the EXT REF IN.  
Internaluses the Test Sets internal timebase and ignores signals  
connected to the EXT REF IN connector.  
Externalrequires a valid reference signal to be connected to the  
EXT REF IN connector.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
The front-panel REFERNCE indicators show which source is selected  
and whether or not the timebase is phase locked. The Test Set will not  
operate correctly if it is unlocked.  
Locking to an external reference may take several seconds. The lower  
the frequency the longer it may take to lock to the signal.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
174  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
RF Chan Std  
RF Chan Std  
R F Ch a n St d  
Use the RF channel standard field to select the channel standard for  
the radio-under-test. The RF generators and the RF analyzers  
frequencies are automatically set to correspond to the channel number  
entered in the RF Channelfield. RF Channelreplaces the RF Gen  
Freqand Tune Freqfields on several screens when the RF Display  
field on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Chan.  
Each standard has a prefix code that indicates what type of radio to  
test; mobile station (MS) or land station (LS). For example, if you are  
testing an AMPS base station, select LS AMPS.  
For the NAMPS standards, a third letter is added indicating which  
frequency band is used: upper, middle, or lower. For example, when  
testing a base station using the upper band you would select  
LSU NAMPS.  
The USER-DEFselection is used to define your own channel  
assignments. When selected, you enter the Base Freq, Chan Space,  
and (Gen)-(Anl)settings.  
For more information see the following related topics:  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The channel standard can also be changed in the lower subfield of the  
RF Channelfield on the SPEC ANL, RF GENERATOR, and RF  
ANALYZER screen.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
175  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
RF Display  
RF Gen Volts  
RF Disp la y  
This field selects the format for entering the RF generators and RF  
analyzers frequencies:  
When Freqis selected, you enter the RF generators and the RF  
analyzers frequencies directly using the keypad or knob.  
When Chanis selected, the RF Gen Freqand Tune Freqfields on  
all screens are replaced by the RF Channelfield, and only the  
channel number is entered and displayed.  
Channel tuning eliminates the need to enter transmit and receive  
frequencies directly into the Test Set. Once your radios RF channel  
standard is selected, you only have to enter the channel number to  
automatically set the RF generator and RF analyzer to the correct  
frequencies.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
See the "RF Chan Std" field on page 175 for more information.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
RF Gen Volt s  
This field specifies whether you want RF voltages expressed as the  
voltage across a 50 ohm load, or the open circuit voltage (emf).  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
This setting affects the RF generators and the tracking generators  
amplitudes.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
176  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
RF In/Out  
RF In/Out  
R F In /Ou t  
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the RF IN/OUT  
port and the device-under-test.  
Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier gain).  
When the RF IN/OUT port is used as an output, the RF generators  
(or tracking generators) level is automatically set the specified  
amount below what is indicated in the RF generators Amplitude  
field. Example; if this value is 10 dB, and the Amplitudefield shows  
0 dBm, the actual level out of this port is 10 dBm.  
When this port is used as an input, the TX Powermeasurement and  
spectrum analyzers marker level (Lvl) are automatically reduced by  
that amount.  
Enter a nega tive value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The RF  
generators (or tracking generators) level out this port is  
automatically set that amount above what is indicated in the RF  
generators Amplitudefield.  
When used as an input, the TX Powerand the spectrum analyzers  
marker level (Lvl) measurements are increased by that amount.  
This field is only used when the RF Level Offsetfield is set to On.  
See the "RF Level Offset" field on page 178 for more information.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
177  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
RF Level Offset  
RF Offset  
RF Level Offset  
This field enables/disables the RF level offsets entered in the RF  
In/Out, Duplex Out, and Antenna Infields below it.  
When set to On, the RF generators amplitude and RF analyzers  
power measurement are offset by the values entered in these fields.  
When set to Off, the values in these fields are ignored.  
For more information see the following related topics:  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
RF Offset  
This field is displayed when the RF Displayfield is set to Freq.  
This field enables/disables the RF generatorRF analyzer frequency  
offset specified in the (Gen)-(Anl)field below it.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
When an RF offset is used, changing the RF generators frequency or  
RF analyzers tune frequency automatically alters the other setting.  
See "Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset" on page 47 for more  
information.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
178  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Save/Recall  
Save/Recall  
Sa ve/R eca ll  
This field specifies which memory device the Test Set accesses when the  
save and recall functions are used.  
Internalis a section of internal RAM. RAM is also used for  
running IBASIC programs, which may require you to delete the  
save/recall registers if the program is very large.  
Cardis the front-panel MEMORY CARD (PC card) slot. A  
Save/Recall Device is not Present message is displayed if  
you try to save or recall an instrument setup when a write-able PC  
card is not installed in the Test Set.  
RAMrefers to RAM disks that you can create on internal RAM. Refer  
to the Programmers Guide for information on creating RAM Disks.  
This is part of the same memory used when internal” is specified,  
and may have to be erased when loading very large IBASIC  
programs. A Save/Recall Device is not initialized  
message is displayed if you try to save or recall an instrument setup  
when a RAM disk has not been created.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
179  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Serial Baud  
Serial No.  
Ser ia l Ba u d  
This field selects the baud rate for serial communications when using  
the serial ports. Selecting this field displays a list of baud rate choices.  
This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIUGRE  
Ser ia l_9 In  
This field selects the destination of characters received by the Test Set  
on the SERIAL PORT 9.  
Instconfigures the serial port to connect to an external ASCII  
terminal or computer to enter IBASIC programs, or to control the  
Test Set using an external keyboard.  
IBASICis used to allow the IBASIC controller to read the serial port  
while a program is running.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
If a serial printer is connected, the PRINT command causes the printer  
to take control of the serial port until printing is done.  
This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
Ser ia l No.  
This field displays the serial number of the Test Set.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
180  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Stop Length  
Total RAM  
St op Len gt h  
This field specifies the number of stop bits (1 or 2) used for serial  
communications when using the serial port.  
This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
I/O CONFIGURE  
Tim e  
This field sets the time-of-day for the instruments 24 hour clock.  
(Example, 4:53 PM is entered 16:53)  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The internal clock still functions when the instrument is turned off.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Tot a l R AM  
This field displays the total amount of RAM available for IBASIC  
programs and save/recall registers.  
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE  
Chapter 6  
181  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields  
Total RAM  
Total RAM  
182  
Chapter6  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Connectors  
Alphabetical Listing of "Connectors" on page 184  
183  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
10 MHz REF OUT  
ANALOG MODULATION IN  
Con n ector s  
10 MH z R EF OUT  
This connector furnishes a 10 MHz reference for external instruments.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
NOTE  
The reference output frequency is always 10 MHz,  
independent of the selected input reference frequency.  
16 × CH IP CLOCK 19.6608 MH z OUT  
This output provides a 19.6608 MHz (16 times the CDMA chip rate)  
square wave with a 50% duty cycle. This signal comes from the CDMA  
frame clocks.  
ANALOG MODULATION IN  
This connector provides an external modulation connection to the RF  
generator.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
The Mod In Tofield of the RF GENERATOR screen sets the type of  
modulation (AM or FM).  
The FM Couplingfield on the RF GENERATOR screen selects ac or dc  
coupling of this signal for FM operation.  
184  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors  
ANT IN  
ANT IN  
ANT IN  
The antenna input is used for analyzing low-power RF signals  
(60 mW), and is typically used for off-the-air measurements. This port  
can be selected in the RF ANALYZER, or SPEC ANL screens.  
CAUTION  
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN port can  
cause instrument damage (although internal protection  
circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal of  
several Watts).  
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a  
warning message at the top of the screen), remove the  
signal from the ANT IN port, and reset using Meas Reset  
(press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key) or turn  
the Test Set off and on to reset it.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
TX power cannot be measured using this port; use the RF IN/OUT port.  
However, low power levels can be measured using this port with the  
spectrum analyzer.  
Additional sensitivity for this port is available using the Sensitivity  
field in the RF ANALYZER and SPEC ANL screens.  
185  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
Two connectors are used to input audio signals to the AF analyzer:  
HI is the main audio signal input connection.  
LO is used for the audio signal reference. Three choices are available  
using the AF ANALYZER screens Audio In Lofield:  
Gndconnects the center pin through approximately 100to  
chassis ground.  
Floatis a floating input.  
600 To Hi provides a 600internal load to match an audio  
source with an output impedance of 600.  
The measured level is the potential between the HI and LO center pins.  
The shells of both connectors are at chassis ground.  
For more information see the "AF Anl In" field on page 123, and the  
"Audio In Lo" field on page 127.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
Input impedance is switchable between 1 Min parallel with 95pF, or  
600floating.  
This port is selected as the AF analyzers input using the AF Anl In  
field on the AF ANALYZER screen.  
Signals input to the AF analyzer are routed through different filters,  
amplifiers, and detectors that affect the displayed measurement.  
CAUTION  
The maximum level between the HI and LO center pins is  
42 V peak (approximately 30 Vrms). Exceeding this value  
can cause permanent instrument damage.  
186  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
AUDIO OUT  
BASEBAND OUT (I and Q)  
AUDIO OUT  
This port is used to output signals from audio frequency generators 1  
and 2.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The output level is set by the AF generators and is not affected by the  
front-panel VOLUME control.  
AC/DC coupling is selected using the Audio Outfield. This field is  
available on the RF GENERATOR screen.  
BASEBAND OUT (I a n d Q)  
These outputs provide buffered versions of the I and Q drive signals.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The I and Q drive signals are balanced by DACs that provide the correct  
dc offset for the I/Q modulator.  
187  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
Chassis Ground  
DUPLEX OUT  
Ch a ssis Gr ou n d  
The chassis ground terminal provides a general chassis connection.  
CH IP CLOCK 1.2288 MH z OUT  
This output provides a 1.2288 MHz (CDMA chip rate) square wave with  
a 50% duty cycle. This signal comes from the CDMA frame clocks.  
DATA IN  
This connector provides a data input to the CDMA generator.  
DUP LEX OUT  
This connector is an output for the RF generator and tracking  
generator.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
The RF generators output is selected in the Output Portfield. This  
field is available on the RF GENERATOR, and SPEC ANL screens.  
CAUTION  
Connecting an RF source of >60 mW to this connector can  
permanently damage the instrument.  
188  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN  
EXT SCOPE TRIG IN  
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN  
This port is an input for the even second clock from the base station  
under test. A positive edge on this connector starts two timers. One  
timer, after reaching terminal counts, starts CDMA frame clocks. The  
other timer starts pilot PN sequence generation. The Even Sec In  
field on the CDMA GENERATOR screen controls this port. See the  
"Even Sec In" field on page 100.  
E XT RE F IN  
This connector allows you to input an external reference. The reference  
frequency is selected using the Ext Ref Infile on the INSTRUMENT  
CONFIGURE screen.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
When a valid signal is applied to the EXT REF IN port, the Test Set  
automatically switches from internal to external reference if the Ref  
Selectfield is set to Auto.  
This signal is used as a reference for, and directly affects, these  
functions:  
RF Generator Frequency (including the Tracking Generator)  
RF Frequency Counter  
AF Frequency Counter  
RF Analyzer Tune Frequency  
Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency  
AF generators 1 and 2 are not affected using an external reference; they  
use their own reference.  
NOTE  
The reference output frequency is always 10 MHz,  
independent of the selected input reference frequency.  
Electrostatic discharges to the EXT REF IN port of 0.5 kV  
or above may cause degradation of performance requiring  
operator intervention.  
EXT SCOP E TR IG IN  
This connector provides an external oscilloscopes trigger input.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
When measured with no load on the input, a 5 Volt level is present on  
the connector due to the internal pull-up resistor design.  
189  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
FRAME CLOCK OUT  
HP-IB  
F RAME CLOCK OUT  
This output provides an external connection to several internal clocks.  
The clocks are selected using the Frame Clock Outputfield on the  
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen. The frame clock selections are as  
follows:  
20.00 ms  
26.67 ms  
80.00 ms  
2.00 s  
HP -IB  
This connector is optional on the Test Set.  
This connector allows communication between the Test Set and other  
instruments or computers using the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus  
(HP-IB).  
For more information see the "HP-IB Adrs" field on page 170.  
190  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
MEMORY CARD Slot  
PARALLEL PORT 16  
ME MOR Y CARD Slot  
This front-panel opening is where PC cards are inserted.  
P ARALLEL P OR T 15  
This port is used with printers requiring a parallel interface when  
printing screen images or test results. Set the Printer Port:field (on  
the PRINTER CONFIGURE screen or TESTS (Printer Setup) screen)  
to Parallelto print to this port. Use address PARALLEL_15 when  
sending data to this port from IBASIC programs.  
Pin numbers are embossed on the connector. Pin assignments are as  
follows:  
F igu r e 7-1 P a r a llel P or t P in Assign m e n t s  
Pin 1  
Pin 14  
nStrobe  
Data 1 (LSB)  
Data 2  
nAutoFD  
NFault  
nInit  
nSelectIn  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Signal Ground (nStrobe)  
Signal Ground (Data 1 and Data 2)  
Signal Ground (Data 3 and Data 5)  
Signal Ground (Data 5 and Data 6)  
Signal Ground (Data 7 and Data 8)  
Signal Ground (Busy nFault)  
Signal Ground (PError, Select, and NAck)  
Signal Ground (nAutoFD, nSelectIn, and Init)  
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
Data 8 (MSB)  
nAck  
Busy  
PError  
Select  
Pin 13  
Pin 25  
P ARALLEL P OR T 16  
PARALLEL PORT 16 is reserved for future enhancements.  
191  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
RF IN/OUT  
SCOPE MONITOR OUTPUT  
RF IN/OUT  
This Type-N connection is used to output signals from the RF generator  
and to input RF signals.  
CAUTION  
Overpower Damage — Refer to the Test Sets connector  
panel for maximum input power level. Exceeding this level  
can cause permanent instrument damage.  
If the RF power at the RF IN/OUT port exceeds allowable  
limits, a loud warning signal sounds and a message  
appears at the top of the screen. If this occurs, disconnect  
the RF power, reset using Meas Reset (press and release the  
Shift key, then the Hold key), and allow the Test Set to cool  
off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other  
measurements on this port.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
This port must be used when measuring TX (RF) power.  
Signals 60 mW can be input to the ANT IN connector for all RF  
measurements except TX Power.  
This port can be selected on the RF ANALYZER, or SPEC ANL screens.  
SCOP E MONITOR OUTP UT  
This connector provides an external output from the AF analyzer.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
The Scope Tofield in the AF ANALYZER screen determines the  
source of this signal. For more information see the "Scope To" field on  
page 149.  
The level is not affected by the front-panel VOLUME knob.  
192  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
SERIAL PORTs 9, 10, and 11  
SERIAL PORTs 9, 10, and 11  
SE R IAL P OR Ts 9, 10, a n d 11  
The serial ports are used to input and output serial data for entering  
programs, printing tests results and screen images, and sending test  
results to a connected controller, disk drive, or terminal.  
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s  
The serial communications settings are defined on the I/O  
CONFIGURE screen.  
SERIAL PORT 9 must be used for serial printing.  
The IBASIC controller sends and receives data to the serial ports using  
address 9 for the primary port, and 10, 11 for the other ports. For  
example, to enter data from the primary serial port into a program  
variable named SDATA, you could use the following command:  
ENTER SERIAL_9;SDATA  
To send data from your program out of the primary serial port, you  
could use the following command:  
OUTPUT SERIAL_9;SDATA  
F igu r e 7-2 Ser ia l P or t P in Assign m en ts  
5
1
9
6
193  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN  
VIDEO OUT  
TRIGGE R QUALIF IE R IN  
This input is active when an external trigger qualifier is selected with  
the Qual Eventfield on the CDMA ANALYZER and CODE DOM  
screens.  
If the trigger is to occur on the TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN signal, select  
Delayin the Trig Eventfield and select a delay of 0.0 µs. If the  
TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN signal is a qualifier, select a trigger source  
in the Trig Eventfield.  
For more information see "Qual Event" field on page 108, and "Trig  
Event" field on page 112.  
VIDE O OUT  
This connector provides a signal for using an external video monitor.  
The signal provides a duplicate of the Test Sets screen.  
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s  
The CRTs Video Output drives a multisync monitor at 19.2 kHz  
(analog). Examples of this type of monitor include the Electrohome  
ECM 1410-DMS 14-inch color monitor and the EVM 1242-P4VID  
12-inch monochrome monitor.  
194  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Accessor ies, Ma n u a ls, Su p p or t  
195  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories, Manuals, Support  
Modifications  
Mod ifica t ion s  
The following information can be found in the HP 8935 Assembly Level  
Repair Manual:  
Hardware Upgrades/Modifications  
Firmware Upgrades  
Power Cables  
196  
Chapter8  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories, Manuals, Support  
Accessories  
Accessor ies  
Ta b le 8-1 Accessor ies  
Descr ip t ion  
None available at this time.  
Or d er in g Nu m b er  
E xt er n a l Mon it or  
The CRTs Video Output drives a multisync monitor at 19.2 kHz  
(analog). Examples of this type of monitor include the Electrohome  
ECM 1410-DMS 14-inch color monitor and the EVM 1242-P4VID  
12-inch monochrome monitor.  
Ma n u a ls (E n glish a n d n on -E n glish )  
Ta b le 8-2 Ma n u a ls  
Or d er in g  
Nu m b er  
Descr ip t ion  
La n gu a ge  
English  
HP 8935 Manuals on CD-ROM  
E6380-90027  
E6380-90016  
E6380-90018  
E6380-90019  
E6380-90017  
E6380-90015  
HP 8935 CDMA Application Guide (paper)  
HP 8935 Programmers Guide (paper)  
HP 8935 Reference Guide (paper)  
English  
English  
English  
English  
HP 8935 AMPS Application Guide (paper)  
HP 8935 Assembly Level Repair Manual (paper) English  
No non-English manuals available at this time.  
Chapter 8  
197  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories, Manuals, Support  
Accessories  
Test Softw a r e  
The Radio Test Software performs automated tests on radios used in  
various radio communication systems. Each test package is contained  
on an individual memory card.  
Ta b le 8-3 Soft w a r e  
E6385A  
E6386A  
E6387A  
HP 8935 Lucent CDMA Cellular/PCS Base Station Test  
Set Software  
HP 8935 Samsung CDMA Cellular/PCS Base Station Test  
Set Software  
HP 8935 Nortel CDMA Cellular/PCS Base Station Test  
Set Software  
Op t ion s  
Ta b le 8-4 H P 8935 Op t ion s  
Or d er  
Nu m b er  
Descr ip t ion  
High Stability Reference  
1D5  
198  
Chapter8  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories, Manuals, Support  
HP Support for Your Instrument  
H P Su p p or t for You r In st r u m en t  
Get t in g H elp  
If you have problems using this Test Set, and cannot find the solution in  
these documents or the Help screens, please use one of the following  
contacts:  
Your local or regional sales office listed in table 8-5, "HP Sales and  
U.S. Call Center: 800 542-4844  
Korea HP Direct: (82/2) 769-0800  
Canada HP Direct: (800) 387-3154  
European Call center: +31 20 547-9990  
Test and Measurement Organization on the web:  
http://www.tmo.hp.com/  
Parts and service for your Test Set can be ordered by  
Chapter 8  
199  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories, Manuals, Support  
HP Support for Your Instrument  
Cu st om er Tr a in in g  
Hewlett-Packard offers customers a variety of training materials and  
classes that explain the theory and applications of many HP products.  
Contact your HP regional sales office to arrange training for you or your  
group.  
Ta b le 8-5 H P Sa les a n d Ser vice Offices  
United States of America  
U.S. Instrument Support  
Center  
For Test & Measurement  
Equipment Repair &  
Calibration.  
United States of America  
Customer Information Center Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
Tel: (800) 752-0900  
United Kingdom  
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.  
Cain Road  
Amen Corner  
Bracknell, Berkshire  
RG12 1HN  
6:00 am to 5:00 pm Pacific  
Time  
Englewood, Colorado 80112  
Parts Direct: 1-800-227-8164  
United Kingdom  
Telephone: (800) 403-0801  
Fax: (888) 857-8161  
Telephone: 44 344 360000  
Fax: 44 344 363344  
South Eastern Europe  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Ges. m.b.h.  
Liebigasse 1  
European Multicountry  
Region  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard S.A.  
P.O. Box 95  
Northern Europe  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Nederland  
B.V.  
P.O. Box 72  
Startbaan 16  
A-1222 Vienna, Austria  
150, Route dv  
1187 XR  
Nant_dl_AVRIL  
CH-1217 Meyrin 2  
Geneva, Switzerland  
Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
P.O. Box 667  
Telephone: 43 222 2500 0  
Telex: 13 4425  
Telephone: 31/20 5476911 X  
6631  
Fax: 31-20-6471825NL  
Telephone: (41/22) 780-8111  
Fax: (41/22) 780-8542  
200  
Chapter8  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessories, Manuals, Support  
HP Support for Your Instrument  
Asia  
J apan  
International Sales Branch  
Headquarters  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard S.A.  
39 Rue Veyrot  
P.O. Box 365  
1217 Meyrin 1  
Geneva, Switzerland  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Asia Ltd.  
22-30/F Peregrine Tower  
Lippo Center  
89 Queensway, Central  
Hong Kong  
Sales and Service  
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard  
Ltd.  
3-29-21, Takaido-Higashi  
Suginami-Ku, Tokyo 168  
Telephone: 81 3 3331-6111  
Fax: 81 3 3331-6631  
G.P.O. Box 863 Hong Kong  
Telephone: 852-848-7777  
Fax: 852-868-4997  
Telephone: 41-22-780-4111  
Fax: 41-22-780-4770  
Australia, New Zealand  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.  
P.O. Box 221  
31-41 J oseph Street  
Blackburn, Victoria 3130  
Canada  
Canada  
Service Center  
Sales and Service  
Hewlett-Packard (Canada)  
Ltd.  
5150 Spectrum Way  
Mississauga, Ontario L4W  
5G1  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
17500 Transcanada Highway  
S. Serv Road  
Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8  
Canada  
Telephone: (61/3) 895-2895  
Fax: (61/3) 898-9257  
Canada  
Telephone: (416) 206-3295  
Telephone: (416) 206-4725  
Fax: (416) 206-4739  
Canada  
Latin America  
Service Center  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
LAHQ Mexico City  
Col. Lomas de Virreyes  
11000 Mexico D.F.  
Mexico  
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.  
11120 178 Street  
Edmonton, Alberta T5S 1P2  
Canada  
Telephone: (403) 486-6666  
Fax: (403) 489-8764  
Telephone: (52/5) 326-4000  
Fax: (52/5) 202 7718  
Chapter 8  
201  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories, Manuals, Support  
HP Support for Your Instrument  
202  
Chapter8  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
E r r or Messa ges  
203  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
General Information About Error Messages  
Gen er a l In for m a tion Ab ou t Er r or Messa ges  
Information concerning error messages displayed by the Test Set may  
be found in one of the following manuals:  
HP 8935 Programmers Guide  
HP 8935 Assembly Level Repair Manual  
HP Instrument BASIC Users Handbook:  
A Beginners Guide to SCPI  
The format of the displayed message determines which manual  
contains information about the error message. There are four basic  
error message formats:  
Positive numbered error messages  
IBASIC error messages  
HP-IB error messages  
Text only error messages  
The following paragraphs give a brief description of each message  
format and direct you to the manual to look in for information about  
error messages displayed in that format.  
P ositive Nu m ber ed Er r or Messa ges  
Positive numbered error messages are generally associated with  
IBASIC. Refer to the HP Instrument BASIC Users Handbook for  
information on IBASIC error messages.  
Positive numbered error messages take the form:  
ERROR XX  
For example:  
Error 54 Duplicate file name  
or  
Error 80 in 632 Medium changed or not in drive  
204  
Chapter9  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
General Information About Error Messages  
Nega t ive Nu m b er ed Er r or Messa ges  
Negative numbers preceding the error messages text correspond to the  
error conditions outlined in the Standard Commands for Programmable  
Instruments (SCPI). For more information on SCPI, order the following  
book,  
A Beginners Guide to SCPI Addison-Wesley Publishing Company ISBN  
0-201-56350-9 HP P/N 5010-7166  
or contact,  
Fred Bode, Executive Director SCPI Consortium  
8380 Hercules Drive, Suite P3  
La Mesa, CA 91942  
Phone: (619) 697-8790, FAX: (619) 697-5955 CompuServe Number:  
76516,254  
Negative numbered error messages take the form: ERROR XX <error  
message>  
For example  
Error -128 Numeric data not allowed  
or  
Error -141 Invalid character data  
IBASIC Er r or Messa ges  
IBASIC Error Messages are associated with IBASIC operation. IBASIC  
error messages can have both positive and negative numbers. Refer to  
the HP Instrument BASIC Users Handbook for information on positive  
numbered error messages. Refer to the HP-IB Error Messages section  
of the Programmers Guide for information on negative numbered error  
messages (the error message associated with a negative number is the  
same for HP-IB errors and IBASIC errors).  
IBASIC er r or m e ssa ge s t a k e t h e for m :  
IBASIC Error: -XX  
For example:  
IBASIC Error: -286 Program runtime error  
Chapter 9  
205  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
General Information About Error Messages  
HP -IB Er r or Messa ges  
HP-IB Error Messages are associated with HP-IB operation. Refer to  
the Programmers Guide for information on HP-IB error messages.  
H P -IB er r or m essa ges t a k e t h e for m :  
HP-IB Error: -XX  
or  
HP-IB Error  
For example:  
HP-IB Error: -410 Query INTERRUPTED.  
or  
HP-IB Error: Input value out of range.  
Text On ly Er r or Messa ges  
Text only error messages are generally associated with manual  
operation of the Test Set. This manual contains information on text  
only error messages.  
Text only error messages can also be displayed while running the Test  
Sets built-in diagnostic or calibration utility programs. Refer to the  
Assembly Level Repa ir manual for information on text only error  
messages displayed while running the Test Sets built-in diagnostic or  
calibration utility programs.  
Text only error messages take the form:  
This is an error message.  
Input value out of range.  
206  
Chapter9  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
General Information About Error Messages  
Th e Messa ge Disp la y  
During instrument operation, various messages may appear on the  
Test Sets display. Prompt-type messages generally appear on the first  
line of the Test Sets display. General operating and error messages  
usually appear on the second line of the display. Some messages are  
persistent; they remain displayed until the error condition no longer  
exists, or until another persistent message with greater priority occurs.  
Other messages are only displayed when the error first occurs; they are  
removed when a key is pressed or the knob is turned, or when an HP-IB  
command is received. Many of the messages are displayed on the  
ERROR MESSAGE screen until the instrument is turned off.  
Messages that are about error conditions may tell you what to do to  
correct the error (turn something off, reduce a fields value, press a  
certain key, and so forth). Messages and prompts are sometimes  
accompanied by a beep or warble.  
NOTE  
Wa r b les a n d Beep s  
A warble sound indicates that an instrument-damaging  
event is occurring. Beeps often occur only with the first  
occurrence of the message. Prompts are generally silent.  
Non -Recover a b le F ir m w a r e Er r or  
The non-recoverable firmware error is very important. It appears when  
an unanticipated event occurs that the Test Sets firmware cannot  
handle. The message appears in the center of the Test Sets display and  
(except for the two lines in the second paragraph) has the form:  
Non-recoverable firmware error. Please record the 2 lines of  
text below and contact Hewlett-Packard through your local  
service center or by calling (800) 827-3848 (USA, collect) and  
asking to speak to the Service Engineer.  
‘Address error exception’  
at line number 0  
To continue operation, turn POWER off and back on.  
Follow the instructions in the message.  
Unfortunately, you will not be able to recover from this condition. You  
must switch the Test Set off and back on. When you rerun the test  
where the Error Message occurred, it may not occur again. If it does  
reappear, it would be helpful to Hewlett-Packard to record exactly what  
the configuration of the instrument was when the error appeared and  
contact Hewlett-Packard.  
Chapter 9  
207  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
General Information About Error Messages  
Text On ly Er r or Messa ges  
Operation errors generally occur when you try to do something the Test  
Set was not designed to do. Most messages tell you what to do to correct  
the problem, (turn something off, reduce a fields value, press a certain  
key,…and so forth).  
Some common messages are listed here:  
All self tests passed.  
The Test Set did not detect any hardware or firmware failures  
during its initial self-diagnostics.  
This message should always be displayed immediately after  
instrument turn on.  
Input value out of range.  
A number was entered that was too large or small for the selected  
field, for example, trying to set AFG1 Freqto 125 kHz.  
Invalid keystroke.  
You used a key that has no function relating to the selected field,  
for example, pressing the On/Off key while the Filter 1field is  
selected.  
Option not installed.  
You selected a function that requires optional hardware that is  
not present.  
Turn off either AM or FM settings.  
You tried to create simultaneous AM and FM (using any  
combination of AFGen1, AFGen2, and the Mod In Tofield). The  
Test Set does not provide simultaneous AM and FM.  
Squelch interrupt overflow. Reset using Meas Reset (press and release  
the Shift key, then the Hold key).  
The Test Set temporarily interrupts audio measurements when  
squelch is first broken to prevent internal switching transients  
from influencing measurements (except when using the SCOPE,  
SPEC ANL, SERVICE screens). If squelch is repetitively broken  
in a period of a few seconds, the duration of measurement  
interruption becomes too great, and the Test Set stops  
interrupting the signal. Following measurements may be  
influenced by transient signals.  
Meas Reset clears the data buffer used to generate interrupts,  
resetting the normal squelch operation to eliminate transients.  
This condition may occur when monitoring low-level off-the-air  
signals.  
208  
Chapter9  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
General Information About Error Messages  
Cal file checksum incorrect - initializing file.  
This error usually occurs after changing the Test Sets firmware  
ROMs. It is not a problem in that instance, but should not  
re-appear during subsequent operation of the Test Set.  
One or more self tests failed. Error code: XXXX  
An instrument failure was detected when the Test Set was turned  
on. (For example, having a stuck front-panel key during turn on.)  
The numbered error message corresponds to a binary-weighted  
group of errors listed in the *TST Common Command description  
in the Programmers Guide.  
Change Ref Level, Input Port or Attenuator (if using Hold).  
The RF signal level is either too great or too small for the current  
input port, attenuator setting, or both. This error often occurs  
when trying to make a low-level measurement using the RF  
IN/OUT port with the spectrum analyzer. Make the indicated  
changes until this message is no longer displayed.  
Change RF Gen Amplitude, Output Port or Atten Hold (if on).  
This message appears when the RF Generators Amplitudefield  
is set too high when using the RF IN/OUT port or when adjusting  
the amplitude with the Atten Holdfield set to On.  
The RF IN/OUT port has a lower maximum output level than the  
DUPLEX OUT port. Use the DUPLEX OUT port, or reduce the RF  
generators level.  
If Atten Holdis On, you may be adjusting the amplitude outside  
of the allowed range. Change the amplitude  
Direct latch write occurred. Cycle power when done servicing.  
The SERVICE screen was accessed and one or more internal  
latch settings were changed. Turn the instrument off and back on  
to reset the latches. (This condition can occur during periodic  
calibration.)  
Chapter 9  
209  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
General Information About Error Messages  
210  
Chapter9  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
- - - -  
Sym bols  
Nu m e r ics  
meaning of, squelch, 153  
# of Frames  
data source, 99  
% delta key, 26  
% key, 26  
10 MHz REF OUTPUT connector,  
meaning of, TX power  
measurement, 36  
184  
16 x CHIP CLOCK connector, 184  
19.6608 MHz OUT connector, 184  
600 ohm impedance  
at AUDIO IN, 127  
meaning of, TX power  
measurements, 120  
+/- key, 30  
Index  
211  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
A
Speaker Vol field, 152  
TX Power field, 120  
TX Pwr Zero, 157  
AF Anl In field  
AM depth  
measurements, 37  
setting, 124, 125  
AM Depth field  
RF Analyzer screen, 116  
RF Generator screen, 116  
AM depth measurements, 37  
AM Mod  
Abort Print field  
Printer Configure screen, 162  
abort printing, 161  
ac coupling  
AF Analyzer screen, 123  
AF Anl Input  
input, 133  
field, 72  
output, 127  
AF Anl key, 25  
AC level  
AF Cnt Gate field  
AF Analyzer screen, 123  
AF Freq field  
oscilloscope input, 72  
peak detector, 143  
Ampl Hi  
AC Level field  
trigger qualifier, 108  
Ampl Lo  
AF Analyzer screen, 116  
RF Analyzer screen, 116  
ac level measurements, 37  
accessories, 197  
AF Analyzer screen, 117  
RF Analyzer screen, 117  
RF Generator screen, 117  
AF frequency measurements, 38  
AF generator 1  
trigger qualifier, 108  
Ampl Mid  
trigger qualifier, 108  
amplifier  
ADC FS field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 93  
ADC FS measurements, 82, 83  
ADCFS field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 82, 83  
CDMA Generator screen, 82, 83  
ADCfs field  
amplitude, 124  
for distortion measurements,  
frequency, 124  
142  
for SINAD measurements, 142  
amplitude  
output destination, AUDIO  
OUT connector, 124  
output destination, RF  
generator AM modulator,  
124  
AF generator, 124, 125  
RF generator, 126  
vertical sensitivity, 158  
Amplitude field  
CDMA Generator screen, 93  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
93  
output destination, RF  
generator FM modulator,  
124  
CDMA Generator screen, 93  
RF Analyzer screen, 126  
RF Generator screen, 126  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 126  
AMPS, 175  
address  
HP-IB, test set, 170  
turning off, 124  
AF analyzer  
AF generator 2  
input, 123  
amplitude, 125  
signal types analyzed, 123  
AF Analyzer screen  
AC Level field, 116  
AF Anl In field, 123  
AF Cnt Gate field, 123  
AF Freq field, 117  
AM Depth field, 116  
Audio In Lo field, 127  
DC Level field, 117  
De-Emp Gain, 129  
De-Emphasis field, 129  
Detector field, 130  
Distn field, 118  
frequency, 125  
analog meter, 39  
ANALOG MODULATION IN  
connector  
output destination, AUDIO  
OUT connector, 125  
output destination, RF  
generator AM modulator,  
125  
description, 184  
ANALOG MODULATION INPUT  
connector  
output destination, RF  
generator FM modulator,  
125  
coupling, 133  
for modulating RF generator,  
140  
turning off, 125  
analyzer  
AFGen1 Freq field  
RF Generator screen, 124  
AFGen1To field  
calibration, 68  
frequency, markers, 133  
input port, 148  
Ext Load R field, 131  
RF Generator screen, 124  
AFGen2 Freq field  
RF Generator screen, 125  
AFGen2 To field  
Analyzer field  
Filter 1 field, 131  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 94  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
94  
Filter 2 field, 132  
FM Deviation field, 118, 121  
Freq Error field, 119  
Frequency field, 119  
Gain Cntl field, 134  
Input Gain field, 136  
Notch Freq field, 141  
Notch Gain field, 142  
Pk Det To field, 143  
Scope To field, 149  
Settling field, 151  
SINAD field, 122  
RF Generator screen, 125  
analyzer, RF  
ALC  
frequency, 156  
disabling, 152  
sensitivity, 150  
internal speaker, 152  
Anl Dir field  
AM  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 95  
input, 140  
Anl Special field  
AM Demod  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 95  
ANT IN connector  
avoiding damage, 36, 120, 136,  
148  
AF Anl In, 37  
oscilloscope input, 72  
AM Depth  
SNR field, 122  
AF Analyzer screen, 116  
connecting to, 24, 148  
Speaker ALC field, 152  
212  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
description, 185  
coupling, 127  
B
for off-the-air measurements,  
description, 187  
bandwidth  
136  
for RF measurements, 136  
gain at, 162  
input attenuation, 135  
Audio Out field  
IF filter, 135  
RF Generator screen, 127  
audio power measurements, 116  
Auto All  
Base Freq field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
163  
loss at, 162  
Range Hold, 173  
base settings  
sensitivity, 150  
Auto Zero field  
changing, 50  
Antenna In field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 95  
RF Analyzer screen, 128  
Auto/Norm field  
Oscilloscope screen, 127  
automatic level control, 152  
autoranging  
default, 50  
Instrument Configure screen,  
BASEBAND OUT connector, 187  
basic operation, 33  
battery, replacing, 53  
baud rate, 180  
beeper  
error alert, 164  
volume control, 160, 164  
Beeper field  
162  
Arm Meas, 94  
arrow down  
key, 42  
arrow up  
AF/RF measurements, 173  
gain setting, 134  
oscilloscope interference, 134,  
key, 42  
ASCII terminal  
configuring, 180  
135  
Instrument Configure screen,  
ASSIGN, 52  
spectrum analyzer interference,  
160, 164  
Assign key, 52  
134, 135  
bits  
assistance  
auto-tuning  
serial data word, 165  
call center, Europe, 199  
call center, United States, 199  
HP Direct, Canada, 199  
HP Direct, Korea, 199  
Atten Hold field  
AF/RF measurements, 173  
average power measurements, 82  
averaging  
measurement results, 46  
restart averaging, 46  
Avg 1-100 field  
Bypass  
CW RF Path, 98  
bypass IQ modulator, 98  
RF Generator screen, 126  
attenuation  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 140  
automatic control, 135  
input, RF analyzer, 135  
manual control, 135  
attenuator hold, 126  
attenuator input, 135  
audio amplitude  
Avg key, 46  
Avg Pwr field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 82  
CDMA Generator screen, 82  
AWGN generator, 101  
setting, 124, 125  
audio frequency counter  
gate time, 123  
sampling, 123  
audio frequency measurements,  
37  
Audio In  
AF Anl In, 37  
oscilloscope input, 72  
AUDIO IN connector  
avoiding damage to, 186  
description, 186  
for ac level measurements, 37  
AUDIO IN HI connector, 186  
AUDIO IN LO connector  
600 ohm impedance, 127, 186  
floating, 127, 186  
grounded, 127, 186  
Audio In Lo field  
AF Analyzer screen, 127  
Audio Out  
oscilloscope input, 72  
AUDIO OUT connector  
Index  
213  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
C
Gen Mode field, 101  
Gen Special field, 102  
Magnitude Error field, 88  
Output Port field, 105  
Phase Error field, 88  
RF Channel field, 109  
RF Gen Freq field, 109  
Rho field, 84  
Analyzer field, 94  
CarFT, 87  
cable fault measurements, 62  
calibration  
CarFT field, 96  
Controls field, 97  
channel power measurements,  
Freq Err field, 100  
Input Port field, 103  
Lvl field, 103  
96  
spectrum analyzer, 68  
CarFT field  
Meas Intvl field, 103  
Measurement field, 104  
Num Avgs field, 104  
Ofs Trnsfer field, 105  
Pwr Scale field, 107  
Qual Event field, 108  
RF Channel field, 109  
RF In/Ant field, 110  
Threshold field, 110  
Time Offset field, 111  
TmOfs field, 85, 111  
Trig Event field, 112  
Walsh Chan field, 113  
code domain phase  
measurements, 92  
code domain power  
measurements, 90  
code domain timing  
measurements, 91  
Configure Instrument screen  
RF Offset field, 178  
Serial No. field, 180  
Time field, 181  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
Time Offset field, 85  
87, 96  
Center Freq field  
carrier feedthrough  
measurements, 87  
Carrier Feedthru field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 87  
CDMA Generator screen, 87  
catalog memory card, 66  
CDMA Analyzer screen  
ADC FS field, 82, 83, 93  
Analyzer field, 94  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 128  
center frequency, 112, 119  
for notch filter, 141  
for spectrum analyzer, 128  
RF signal, 156  
spectrum analyzer marker, 139  
Chan  
RF Display mode, 109, 176  
Chan Pwr field  
Anl Dir field, 95  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 83  
CDMA Generator screen, 83  
Chan Space field  
Anl Special field, 95  
Auto Zero field, 95  
Avg Pwr field, 82  
Instrument Configure screen,  
Carrier Feedthru field, 87  
Chan Pwr field, 83  
Chn Pwr Cal field, 96  
Even Sec In field, 100  
EVM field, 88  
164  
channel numbers  
for analyzer/generator  
frequencies, 40  
channel power measurements, 83  
channel spacing, user defined,  
164  
Freq Error field, 85  
Gain field, 100  
Input Atten field, 102  
Input Port field, 103  
Magnitude Error field, 88  
Meas Intvl field, 103  
Phase Error field, 88  
PN Offset field, 106  
Pwr Gain field, 106  
Pwr Intvl field, 107  
Pwr Zero field, 107  
Qual Event field, 108  
RF Channel field, 109  
Rho field, 84  
channel standard  
Total RAM field, 181  
AMPS (MS, LS), 175  
ETACS (MS, LS), 175  
J TACS (MS, LS), 175  
KOR PCS (1, 0), 175  
N AMER PCS, 175  
NAMPS(MSL, MSM, MSU,  
LSL, LSM, LSU), 175  
NTACS (MS, LS), 175  
TACS (MS, LS), 175  
USER-DEF, 175  
connectors  
10 MHz REF OUTPUT, 184  
16 x CHIP CLOCK, 184  
19.6608 MHz OUT, 184  
ANALOG MODULATION IN,  
184  
ANT IN, 185  
AUDIO IN, 186  
AUDIO OUT, 187  
BASEBAND OUT, 187  
CHIP CLOCK 1.2288 MHz  
OUT, 188  
channel tuning, 40, 109, 176  
chassis ground, 188  
CHIP CLOCK 1.288 MHz OUT  
connector, 188  
Time Offset field, 85  
Trig Event field, 112  
CDMA Anl key, 25  
CDMA Gen key, 25  
CDMA Generator screen  
ADC FS field, 82, 83, 93  
Amplitude field, 93  
Avg Pwr field, 82  
DATA IN, 188  
DUPLEX OUT, 188  
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN, 189  
EXT REF IN, 189  
Chn Pwr Cal field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 96  
clear  
EXT SCOPE TRIG IN, 189  
FRAME CLOCK OUT, 190  
ground, 188  
global user key assignment, 52  
RAM, 76  
Carrier Feedthru field, 87  
Chan Pwr field, 83  
CW RF Path field, 98  
Data Rate field, 98  
Data Source field, 99  
EVM field, 88  
register contents, 49, 76  
HP-IB, 190  
clock  
I BASEBAND OUT, 187  
PARALLEL PORT 15, 191  
PARALLEL PORT 16, 191  
Q BASEBAND OUT, 187  
RF IN/OUT, 192  
date/time, 165  
time-of-day, 181  
Code Dom key, 25  
Code Domain Analyzer screen  
ADCfs field, 93  
Freq Error field, 85  
Gen Dir field, 101  
214  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
SCOPE MONITOR OUTPUT,  
192  
D
AM, 37, 72  
FM, 37, 72  
dashes  
SERIAL PORT 10, 193  
SERIAL PORT 11, 193  
SERIAL PORT 9, 193  
TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN, 194  
VIDEO OUT, 194  
Cont/Single field  
Oscilloscope screen, 128  
continuous measurements, 94  
Controls field  
SSB, 37, 72  
meaning of, squelch, 153  
depth, AM, 37  
meaning of, TX power  
measurements, 36, 120  
Data Buff  
detector  
peak, 130, 143  
rms, 130  
data source, 99  
selecting, 130  
data buffer, 101  
data collection, 66  
data files, replotting, 65  
data files, transferring, 65  
DATA IN connector, 188  
Data Length field  
I/O Configure screen, 165  
Data Rate field  
CDMA Generator screen, 98  
Data Source field  
CDMA Generator screen, 99  
date and time, 160  
Date field  
Detector field  
AF Analyzer screen, 130  
deviation  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
FM, 37, 118, 121  
Disarm, 94  
97  
Oscilloscope screen, 128  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 128  
COPY_PL, IB_UTIL ROM  
program, 74  
Distn field  
AF Analyzer screen, 118  
RF Analyzer screen, 118  
RF Generator screen, 118  
distortion, 38  
counter  
AF, 123  
measurements, 38, 118  
measurements, amplifier, 142  
measurements, variable notch  
filter, 141  
RF, 147  
coupling  
Instrument Configure screen,  
ac, 127, 133  
160, 165  
dc, 127, 133  
dump graphics, 161  
DUPLEX OUT connector  
avoiding damage, 143  
description, 188  
gain at, 166  
dB key, 26  
notch frequency, 171  
cursor control knob  
increment setting of, 42  
CW RF Path field  
CDMA Generator screen, 98  
dBm key, 26  
dBuV key, 26  
dc coupling  
input, 133  
loss at, 166  
output, 127  
Duplex Out field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
166  
DC Level field  
AF Analyzer screen, 117  
dc level measurements, 38, 117  
DCFM, 133  
decimal numbers, 30  
decrement  
changing setting, 42  
De-emp  
oscilloscope filters, 72  
De-Emp Gain field  
AF Analyzer screen, 129  
de-emphasis  
bypassing, 129  
gain, 129  
selecting, 129  
De-Emphasis field  
AF Analyzer screen, 129  
default settings  
base, 50  
changing, 49, 50  
power-on, 49  
delay  
trigger, 112  
delete  
global user key assignment, 52  
RAM contents, 76  
register contents, 49, 76  
DEMO, 78  
demodulation  
Index  
215  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
E
F
meaning of, TX power  
measurements, 120  
FRAME CLOCK OUT connector,  
190  
Frame Clock Output field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
169  
Eb/No, 101  
fast power measurements, 91  
FF at End field  
Printer Configure screen, 167  
FF at Start field  
Printer Configure screen, 167  
fields  
EEX key, 30  
emf voltage, 176  
Error Message key, 25  
error messages, 204  
IBASIC echo, 170  
operation, 208  
Freq  
changing settings, 25  
RF Display mode, 109, 112, 176  
Freq (marker) field  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 133  
Freq Err field  
error vector magnitude. See EVM  
ETACS, 175  
types of, 25  
FILE_XFER, IB_UTIL ROM  
program, 74  
European Call Center, assistance,  
199  
files  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
Even Sec In field  
securing, 75  
100  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 100  
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN  
connector, 189  
Filter 1 field  
Freq Error field  
AF Analyzer screen, 131  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 85  
CDMA Generator screen, 85  
frequency  
Filter 2 field  
AF Analyzer screen, 132  
Filters  
EVM field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 88  
CDMA Generator screen, 88  
EVM measurements, 88  
exponents  
AF generator 2, 125  
oscilloscope filters, 72  
AFGen1, 124  
filters  
center, 118, 119  
IF bandwidth, 135  
variable notch, 141  
firmware  
center, for notch filter, 141  
center, for spectrum analyzer,  
128  
entering numbers, 30  
Ext  
data source, 99  
revision number, 167  
center, RF signal, 156  
effects of RF offset, 178  
measurements, 119  
RF generator, reference, 163  
setting, 148, 176  
Ext Load R field  
Firmware field  
AF Analyzer screen, 131  
Instrument Configure screen,  
Ext Mod  
167  
AF Anl In, 37  
floating input  
oscilloscope input, 72  
EXT REF IN connector, 189  
Ext Ref In field  
at AUDIO IN LO, 127  
Flow Control field  
I/O Configure screen, 168  
FM  
span, 151  
spectrum analyzer, 133  
frequency error  
Instrument Configure screen,  
measurements, 85, 119  
Frequency Error field  
AF Analyzer screen, 119  
RF Analyzer screen, 119  
RF Generator screen, 119  
Frequency field  
AF Analyzer screen, 119  
RF Analyzer screen, 119  
RF Generator screen, 119  
frequency offset, 47  
receiver/transmitter, 169  
RF generator/analyzer, 169  
tracking generator, 142  
frequency tuning, 40, 109, 176  
functional test  
166  
deviation, 37  
EXT SCOPE TRIG IN connector,  
deviation, measurements, 118,  
189  
121  
deviation, setting, 124, 125  
external AM input, 140  
external FM input, 140  
external modulation input, 140  
external monitor, 197  
external reference, 189  
external trigger qualifier, 108  
input, 140  
FM Coupling field  
RF Generator screen, 133  
FM Demod  
AF Anl In, 37  
oscilloscope input, 72  
FM Deviation field  
AF Analyzer screen, 118, 121  
RF Analyzer screen, 118, 121  
RF Generator screen, 118, 121  
FM deviation measurements, 37,  
38  
for verifying operation, 31  
FM Mod  
AF Anl In, 37  
oscilloscope input, 72  
form feed, 167  
forward link, 95  
four dashes  
meaning of, squelch, 153  
meaning of, TX power  
measurement, 36  
216  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
G
at AUDIO IN LO, 127  
grounding, 188  
H
gain  
heading  
automatic control, 134  
for printout, 172  
between ANT IN and  
device-under-test, 162  
between DUPLEX OUT and  
device-under-test, 166  
between RF IN/OUT and  
device-under-test, 177  
de-emphasis, 129  
help  
how to contact a human, 199  
Help key, 25  
hexadecimal format, 30  
HI indicator, 43  
Hi Limit key, 43  
high limit  
input, 136  
removing, 44  
manual control, 134  
setting, 43  
notch filter, 142  
Hold All  
Gain Cntl field  
Range Hold, 173  
horizontal sweep  
oscilloscope, 154  
HP Direct assistance  
Canada, 199  
AF Analyzer screen, 134  
Gain field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 100  
gain measurement, swept, 58  
gate time, 123  
Korea, 199  
RF counter, 147  
HP-IB address  
test set, 170  
Gen Dir field  
CDMA Generator screen, 101  
HP-IB Address field  
Configure I/O screen, 170  
HP-IB connector, 190  
HP-IB operation  
squelch effects, 153  
Hz key, 26  
Gen Mode field  
CDMA Generator screen, 101  
Gen Special field  
CDMA Generator screen, 102  
(Gen)-(Anl) (user defined) field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
169  
(Gen)-(Anl) field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
169  
generator, AF  
amplitude, 124, 125  
frequency, 124, 125  
output destination, AUDIO  
OUT connector, 124, 125  
output destination, RF  
generator AM modulator,  
124, 125  
output destination, RF  
generator FM modulator,  
124, 125  
turning off, 124, 125  
generator, RF  
amplitude, 126  
frequency, 148  
output port, 143, 144  
reference frequency, 163  
generator, tracking  
frequency, 128  
frequency offset, 142  
output port, 144  
sweep, 144  
sweep frequency range, 151  
GHz key, 26  
grounded input  
Index  
217  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
I
input attenuation  
IQ  
automatic control, 135  
manual control, 135  
setting, 135  
CW RF path, 98  
I BASEBAND OUT connector,  
IQ modulator, 98  
187  
IQ RFOUT  
connector, 98  
I/O Config key, 25  
I/O Configure screen  
Data Length field, 165  
Flow Control field, 168  
HP-IB Address field, 170  
IBASIC Echo field, 170  
Inst Echo field, 170  
Mode field, 171  
input attenuator  
oscilloscope, 134, 135  
spectrum analyzer, 134, 135  
Input Gain field  
AF Analyzer screen, 136  
input impedance  
selecting, 186  
Input Port field  
Parity field, 172  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 103  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
103  
Save/Recall field, 179  
Serial Baud field, 180  
Serial In field, 180  
Stop Length field, 181  
IB_UTIL  
Instrument Configure screen,  
136  
RF Analyzer screen, 136  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 136  
insertion loss measurements  
discrete frequency, 59  
swept, 59  
COPY_PL, 74  
FILE_XFER, 74  
RAM_MANAGER, 76  
RAM_USAGE, 74  
ROM program, 74  
SECURE_IT, 75  
Inst Config key, 25  
Inst Echo field  
IBASIC controller  
configuring, 180  
I/O Configure screen, 170  
Instrument Configure screen  
Antenna In field, 162  
Base Freq field, 163  
Beeper field, 160, 164  
Chan Space field, 164  
Date field, 160, 165  
Duplex Out field, 166  
Ext Ref In field, 166  
Firmware field, 167  
Frame Clock Output field, 169  
(Gen)-(Anl) field, 169  
Input Atten field, 135  
Input Port field, 136  
Notch Coupl field, 171  
Range Hold field, 173  
Ref Select field, 174  
RF Chan Std field, 175  
RF Display field, 176  
RF Gen Volts field, 176  
RF In/Out field, 177  
RF Level Offset field, 178  
Time field, 160  
IBASIC Echo field  
I/O Configure screen, 170  
IBASIC error messages, 170  
IF filter bandwidth  
selecting, 135  
IF Filter field  
RF Analyzer screen, 135  
impedance  
input, 186  
Incr (divide-by)10 key, 42  
Incr Set key, 42  
Incr x10 key, 42  
increment  
changing setting, 42  
Input  
oscilloscope filters, 72  
input  
analyzer, 148  
audio, 600 ohm impedance, 127  
audio, floating, 127  
audio, grounded, 127  
coupling, 133  
User Def Base Freq field, 163  
gain, 136  
interactions  
RF, 136  
high-power/low-power  
measurements, 157  
Range Hold and other fields,  
173  
spectrum analyzer, 148  
types of, 123  
Input Atten field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 102  
Instrument Configure screen,  
135  
RF generator/analyzer, RF  
offset, 178  
Internal field  
RF Analyzer screen, 135  
Oscilloscope screen, 137  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 135  
218  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
J
K
increment setting, 42  
J TACS, 175  
k1 through k5 keys, 51  
k1’ through k3’ keys, 51  
keyboard  
external, 180  
keys  
%, 26  
% delta, 26  
+/-, 30  
AF Anl, 25  
Assign, 52  
Avg, 46  
CDMA Anl, 25  
CDMA Gen, 25  
Code Dom, 25  
dB, 26  
dBm, 26  
dBuV, 26  
down-arrow, 42  
EEX, 30  
Error Message, 25  
GHz, 26  
Help, 25  
Hi Limit, 43  
Hz, 26  
I/O Config, 25  
Incr (divide-by)10, 42  
Incr Set, 42  
Incr x10, 42  
Inst Config, 25  
k1 through k5, 51  
k1’ through k3, 51  
kHz, 26  
Lo Limit, 43  
Meter, 39  
MHz, 26  
ms, 26  
mV, 26  
mW, 26  
On/Off, 39, 44, 45, 46, 49  
ppm, 26  
Printer Config, 25  
Recall, 48  
Ref Set, 45  
Release, 52  
RF Anl, 25  
RF Gen, 25  
s, 26  
Save, 48  
Scope, 25  
Spec Anl, 25  
up-arrow, 42  
uV, 26  
V, 26  
W, 26  
kHz key, 26  
knob  
Index  
219  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
L
M
carrier feedthrough, 87  
channel power, 83  
code domain phase, 92  
code domain power, 90  
code domain timing, 91  
dc level, 38, 117  
deviation, FM, 118  
distortion, 38, 118  
EVM, 88  
level  
Magnitude Error field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 88  
CDMA Generator screen, 88  
magnitude error measurements,  
88  
ac, 37  
dc, 38  
oscilloscope, 138  
reference for spectrum analyzer,  
146  
manuals, 197  
Level (div) field  
Marker To field  
Oscilloscope screen, 137  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 139  
Marker To Peak- field  
Oscilloscope screen, 139  
Marker To Peak+ field  
Oscilloscope screen, 139  
markers  
fast power, code domain, 91  
FM demodulation, 37, 38  
FM deviation, 37, 121  
frequency error, 85, 119  
frequency, center, 119  
insertion loss, discrete  
frequency, 59  
limits  
indicators, 43  
pass/fail, 43  
removing, 44  
setting, 43  
Lines/Page field  
Printer Configure screen, 171  
LISTOPTS, 77  
frequency, 133  
level, 138  
insertion loss, swept, 59  
magnitude error, 88  
phase error, 88  
oscilloscope, 73, 139  
oscilloscope, peak-, 139  
oscilloscope, peak+, 139  
spectrum analyzer, 139  
spectrum analyzer, center  
frequency, 139  
LO indicator, 43  
Lo Limit key, 43  
loss  
return loss, swept, 60  
RF, 36  
between ANT IN and  
device-under-test, 162  
between DUPLEX and  
device-under-test, 166  
between RF IN/OUT and  
device-under-test, 177  
low limit  
RF power, 120  
rho, 84  
spectrum analyzer, peak, 139  
spectrum analyzer, reference  
level, 139  
rms potential, 116  
signal/noise ratio, 38  
SINAD, 38, 122  
time, 154  
SNR, 38, 122  
triggering, 154  
swept gain, 58  
removing, 44  
Meas Intvl field  
time offset, 85  
setting, 43  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 103  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
103  
measurement accuracy  
gain control for, 134  
zeroing power for, 157  
measurement averaging, 46  
Measurement field  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
104  
transmitter power, 36, 120  
transmitter power, peak, 156  
transmitter power, sample, 156  
voltage, 116  
low-level RF power  
measurements, 120  
Lucent software, 198  
Lvl (marker) field  
Oscilloscope screen, 138  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 138  
Lvl field  
memory  
considerations, 50  
total RAM, 181  
memory card catalog, 66  
memory overflow error, 50  
message  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
103  
measurement limits  
indicators, 43  
beeper alert, 164  
displaying, 160  
removing, 44  
error, 204  
setting, 43  
IBASIC error, 170  
measurement reference, setting,  
operation, 208  
45  
turn off, 160  
measurement settling time, 151  
measurement setups  
saving and recalling, 48  
measurements  
types of, 204  
meter  
end points, 39  
on/off, 39  
ac level, 37, 116  
scale interval, 39  
ac level, peak detector, 143  
Meter key, 39  
ADC FS, 82, 83  
MHz key, 26  
AF frequency, 38  
uV (microvolts) key, 26  
Mod In To field  
AM depth, 37  
audio frequency, 37  
RF Generator screen, 140  
audio power, 116  
average power, 82  
cable fault, 62  
Mode field  
I/O Configure screen, 171  
220  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
Model field  
N
O
Printer Configure screen, 171  
names  
offset  
modulation  
printout, 172  
frequency,  
receiver/transmitter, 169  
frequency, RF  
generator/analyzer, 169  
external AM, 140  
external, FM, 140  
external, input, 140  
input, 140  
registers, 49  
NAMPS, 175  
negative edge  
triggering, 137  
frequency, tracking generator,  
input, coupling, 133  
No Pk/Avg field  
142  
RF generator/analyzer, 178  
RF level, 178  
OQPSK, 101  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 140  
QPSK, 101  
Normalize field  
sensitivity, input, 140  
monitor, external, 197  
ms key, 26  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 141  
Nortel software, 198  
Notch  
oscilloscope filters, 72  
Notch Coupl field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
171  
setting, frequency, 47  
vertical, oscilloscope, 138, 158  
Offset Freq (Tracking Gen) field  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 142  
off-the-air measurements, 136,  
185  
mV key, 26  
mW key, 26  
Ofs Trnsfer field  
used with variable notch, 141  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
notch filter  
105  
gain, 142  
On/Off key, 39, 44, 45, 46, 49  
operating basics, 33  
operation messages, 208  
options, for Test Set, 198  
options, Test Set, 77  
OQPSK modulation, 101  
oscilloscope  
variable, 141  
Notch Freq field  
AF Analyzer screen, 141  
Notch Gain field  
AF Analyzer screen, 142  
NTACS, 175  
Num Avgs field  
description of, 71  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
features, 71  
104  
filters, block diagram of, 71  
filters, selection of, 72  
input attenuator, 134, 135  
inputs, block diagram of, 71  
inputs, selection of, 72  
level, markers, 138  
marker types, 139  
number of frames  
data source, 99  
numbers  
decimal format, 30  
hexadecimal format, 30  
negative, 30  
scientific notation, 30  
markers, 73  
markers, level, 138  
resolution, 149  
scale, 145  
signal source, 149  
squelch effects, 153  
triggering, 73  
oscilloscope interference  
autoranging, 134, 135  
Oscilloscope screen  
Auto/Norm field, 127  
Cont/Single field, 128  
Controls field, 128  
Internal field, 137  
Level (div) field, 137  
Lvl (marker) field, 138  
Marker To Peak- field, 139  
Marker To Peak+ field, 139  
Output Port field, 143  
Position field, 145  
Reset field, 146  
Time (marker) field, 154  
Index  
221  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
Time/div field, 154  
Trig-Delay field, 155  
Vert Offset field, 158  
Vert/div field, 158  
P
changing, 50  
default, 50  
PARALLEL PORT 15 connector,  
print  
191  
screens, 161  
PARALLEL PORT 16 connector,  
output  
Print Title field  
191  
parallel port pin assignments, 191  
Parity field  
coupling, 127  
Printer Configure screen, 172  
RF, 143, 144  
printer  
tracking generator, 144  
Output Port field  
connecting, 172  
I/O Configure screen, 172  
pass/fail limits, 43  
password, 75  
model, 171  
CDMA Generator screen, 105  
Oscilloscope screen, 143  
RF Generator screen, 143  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 143  
overpower  
setup utility, 66  
Printer Config key, 25  
Printer Configure screen  
Abort Print field, 162  
FF at End field, 167  
FF at Start field, 167  
Lines/Page field, 171  
Model field, 171  
PC card catalog, 66  
PCS  
Korean channel standard, 175  
North American channel  
standard, 175  
at RF IN/OUT connector, 136  
damage, at ANT IN, 36  
damage, at ANT IN connector,  
120, 148  
Peak  
TX Pwr Meas field, 156  
Print Title field, 172  
Printer Port field, 172  
Printer Port field  
Printer Configure screen, 172  
printing  
peak  
damage, at DUPLEX, 143  
hold, spectrum analyzer, 140  
spectrum analyzer marker, 139  
peak-  
oscilloscope marker, 139  
peak detector, 130, 143  
signal source, 143  
peak+  
warning, 136  
overpower damage, 24  
overview of operation, 33  
aborting, 162  
form feed, 167  
lines per page, 171  
printer model, 171  
selecting printer port, 172  
title, 172  
oscilloscope marker, 139  
% delta key, 26  
% key, 26  
Pwr Gain field  
Phase Error field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 88  
CDMA Generator screen, 88  
phase error measurements, 88  
Pk Det To field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 106  
Pwr Intvl field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 107  
Pwr Scale field  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
AF Analyzer screen, 143  
107  
Pk Hold field  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 140  
PN Offset field  
Pwr Zero field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 107  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 106  
Port/Sweep (Tracking Gen)  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 144  
Position field  
Oscilloscope screen, 145  
positive edge  
triggering, 137  
power  
average, 82  
channel, 83  
code domain, 90  
code domain, fast, 91  
transmitter, 36  
zero reference, 157  
power meter  
zeroing, 157  
power-on settings  
changing, 49  
ppm key, 26  
preset state  
222  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
Q
R
return loss measurements, swept,  
60  
Q BASEBAND OUT connector,  
radio test software, 198  
reverse link, 95  
187  
RAM  
reverse RF power, 143  
QPSK modulation, 101  
back-up batteries, 53  
clearing, 76  
disk allocations, 74  
loss of data, 53  
revision number  
Qual Event field  
firmware, 167  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 108  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
108  
RF Analyzer screen  
AC Level field, 116  
AF Freq field, 117  
AM Depth field, 116  
Amplitude field, 126  
Auto Zero field, 128  
Distn field, 118  
total available, 181  
total installed, 74  
RAM_MANAGER, IB_UTIL ROM  
program, 76  
RAM_USAGE, IB_UTIL ROM  
program, 74  
FM Deviation field, 118, 121  
Frequency Error field, 119  
Frequency field, 119  
IF Filter field, 135  
Input Atten field, 135  
Input Port field, 136  
RF Channel field, 147  
RF Cnt Gate field, 147  
Sensitivity field, 150  
SINAD field, 122  
random  
data source, 99  
Range Hold field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
173  
recall  
instrument setups, 48  
saved register with hardware  
change, 50  
settings, 48  
SNR field, 122  
Recall key, 48  
Squelch field, 153  
Tune Freq field, 156  
TX Power field, 120  
TX Pwr Meas field, 156  
TX Pwr Zero field, 157  
RF Anl key, 25  
Ref Level field  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 146  
Ref Select field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
174  
Ref Set key, 45  
RF Chan Std field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
175  
reference  
external input, 189  
external output, 184  
level, spectrum analyzer, 146  
setting, 45, 138  
RF Channel field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 109  
CDMA Generator screen, 109  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
109  
transmitter power, zero, 157  
Reference indicators, 45  
registers  
RF Analyzer screen, 147  
clearing, 49  
RF Cnt Gate field  
naming, 49  
RF Analyzer screen, 147  
RF counter  
release  
global user key assignment, 52  
sampling, 147  
Release key, 52  
RF Display field  
remote operation  
mode, 171  
Instrument Configure screen,  
176  
squelch effects, 153  
remove high/low limits, 44  
remove pass/fail limits, 44  
remove register contents, 49  
replot data files, 65  
Reset field  
RF Gen Freq field  
CDMA Generator screen, 109  
RF Generator screen, 148  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 148  
RF Gen key, 25  
RF Gen Volts field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
176  
Oscilloscope screen, 146  
resolution  
bandwidth, spectrum analyzer,  
RF generator  
68  
amplitude, 126  
oscilloscope, 149  
frequency, 148  
Index  
223  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
output, 144  
measurements, 120  
zero reference, 157  
RFTOOLS  
S
output port, 143  
RF Generator screen  
AF Freq field, 117  
s key, 26  
Sample  
cable fault measurements, 62  
catalog memory card, 66  
discrete frequency insertion loss  
measurements, 59  
replot data files, 65  
SA Self Calibration ON/OFF, 65  
Set Up Printer/Data Collection,  
66  
swept gain measurements, 58  
swept insertion loss  
measurements, 59  
swept return loss  
measurements, 60  
transfer stored data, 65  
Rho field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 84  
CDMA Generator screen, 84  
rho measurements, 84  
rms detector, 130  
rms potential  
TX Pwr Meas field, 156  
AFGen1 Freq field, 124  
AFGen1 To field, 124  
AFGen2 Freq field, 125  
AFGEN2 To field, 125  
AM Depth field, 116  
Amplitude field, 126  
Atten Hold field, 126  
Audio Out field, 127  
Distn field, 118  
sampling  
AF counter, 123  
RF counter, 147  
Samsung software, 198  
save  
instrument setups, 48  
settings, 48  
Save key, 48  
save register memory allocations,  
FM Coupling field, 133  
FM Deviation field, 118, 121  
Frequency Error field, 119  
Frequency field, 119  
Mod In To field, 140  
Output Port field, 143  
RF Gen Freq field, 148  
SINAD field, 122  
74  
Save/Recall field  
I/O Configure screen, 179  
saving instrument setups, 48  
saving settings, 48  
scale  
for oscilloscope, 145  
scientific notation  
entering numbers, 30  
scope  
SNR field, 122  
RF In/Ant field  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
measurements, 116  
horizontal sweep, 154  
level, markers, 138  
markers, 138  
110  
ROM program  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 148  
RF IN/OUT connector  
connecting to, 24  
SERVICE4. See the HP 8935  
Assembly Level Repair  
Manual.  
vertical offset, 158  
Scope key, 25  
description, 192  
ROM programs  
SCOPE MONITOR OUTPUT  
connector, 192  
for measuring high-power  
devices, 144  
COPY_PL, 74  
DEMO, 78  
Scope To field  
for measuring transmitter  
power, 136  
FILE_XFER, 74  
AF Analyzer screen, 149  
scope. See oscilloscope.  
screen dump, 161  
screens  
IB_UTIL, 74  
for RF measurements, 136  
for testing transceivers, 143  
gain at, 177  
LISTOPTS, 77  
RAM_MANAGER, 76  
RAM_USAGE, 74  
RFTOOLS, 56  
printing, 161  
input attenuation, 135  
SECURE_IT, IB_UTIL ROM  
program, 75  
loss at, 177  
SECURE_IT, 75  
power measured at, 120  
ST_PLT, 79  
securing files, 75  
RF In/Out field  
sensitivity  
Instrument Configure screen,  
adverse effects on  
measurements, 150  
ANT IN, 150  
177  
RF input, 103, 110  
selecting port, 136  
RF Level Offset field  
Instrument Configure screen,  
178  
modulation input, 140  
Sensitivity field  
RF Analyzer screen, 150  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 150  
Serial Baud field  
I/O Configure screen, 180  
serial data word  
bits, 165  
RF measurements, 36  
RF offset  
setting, 47  
RF Offset field  
Configure Instrument screen,  
Serial In field  
178  
I/O Configure screen, 180  
RF output  
Serial No. field  
selecting port, 143, 144  
Configure Instrument screen,  
RF power  
180  
exceeding limits, 136  
SERIAL PORT 10 connector, 193  
224  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
SERIAL PORT 11 connector, 193  
SERIAL PORT 9 connector, 193  
serial port pin assignments, 193  
SERVICE4. See the HP 8935  
Assembly Level Repair  
Manual.  
Span field  
fixed level, 153  
manual control, 153  
off, 153  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 151  
speaker  
ALC, 152  
using attenuator hold, 126  
disabling, 152  
Squelch field  
RF Analyzer screen, 153  
SSB Demod  
volume control, 152  
settings  
Speaker ALC  
base, 50  
AF Analyzer screen, 152  
Speaker Vol field  
AF Anl In, 37  
beeper volume, 160  
changing, field, 25  
date, 160  
oscilloscope input, 72  
AF Analyzer screen, 152  
ST_PLT, 79  
Spec Anl key, 25  
Start Frame  
default, 49, 50  
spectrum analyzer  
calibration, 68  
data source, 99  
power-on, 49  
stop bit, 181  
recalling, 48  
calibration, self, 65  
frequency, markers, 133  
input attenuator, 134, 135  
input port, 148  
Stop Length field  
I/O Configure screen, 181  
support, 199  
saving, 48  
time, 160  
Settling field  
sweep  
AF Analyzer screen, 151  
interference when autoranging,  
frequency range, tracking  
generator, 151  
settling time  
134, 135  
AF measurements, 151  
setups  
markers, 139  
oscilloscope, 154  
rate, spectrum analyzer, 68  
time per division, 154  
tracking generator, 144  
swept gain measurements, 58  
swept return loss measurements,  
60  
markers, frequency, 133  
measuring low-level RF power,  
120  
recalling, 48  
saving, 48  
signal to noise ratio, 37  
signal/noise ratio  
measurements, 38  
simultaneous AM and FM (not  
allowed), 124, 125  
SINAD  
resolution bandwidth, 68  
span, 68  
squelch effects, 153  
sweep rate, 68  
traces, 141  
use of, 120  
measurements, 122  
measurements, amplifier, 142  
measurements, variable notch  
filter, 141  
Spectrum Analyzer screen  
Amplitude field, 126  
Avg 1-100 field, 140  
Center Freq field, 128  
Controls field, 128  
Freq (marker) field, 133  
Input Atten field, 135  
Input Port field, 136  
Lvl (marker) field, 138  
Marker To field, 139  
No Pk/Avg field, 140  
Normalize field, 141  
Offset Freq (Tracking Gen) field,  
142  
SINAD field  
AF Analyzer screen, 122  
RF Analyzer screen, 122  
RF Generator screen, 122  
SINAD measurements, 38  
Single, 94  
SNR  
measurements, 38, 122  
SNR field  
AF Analyzer screen, 122  
RF Analyzer screen, 122  
RF Generator screen, 122  
SNR measurements, 38  
software  
Output Port field, 143  
Pk Hold field, 140  
Port/Sweep (Tracking Gen), 144  
Ref Level field, 146  
RF Gen Freq field, 148  
RF In/Ant field, 148  
Sensitivity field, 150  
Span field, 151  
automated testing, 198  
Lucent, 198  
Nortel, 198  
Samsung, 198  
source  
Track/Fixed field, 154  
oscilloscope, 149  
peak detector, 143  
span  
squelch  
effects on HP-IB operation, 153  
effects on remote operation, 153  
effects on spectrum analyzer,  
153  
effect on AF analyzer, 151  
spectrum analyzer, 68  
Index  
225  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
T
Trig-Delay field  
U
Oscilloscope screen, 155  
TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN  
connector, 194  
TACS, 175  
U.S. Call Center, assistance, 199  
User Def Base Freq field  
Configure Instrument screen,  
163  
talk & listen, 171  
Threshold field  
TRIGGER/QUALIFIER IN  
connector, 108  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
110  
user keys  
triggering  
time  
markers, 154  
assigning global, 52  
assigning, local, 52  
clearing, global assignment, 52  
deleting, global assignment, 52  
explanation, 51  
automatic, 127  
continuous, 128  
Time (marker) field  
Oscilloscope screen, 154  
time and date, 160  
Time field  
external, oscilloscope, 137  
external, oscilloscope connector,  
189  
global, assignment, 52  
global, defined, 51  
local, defined, 51  
internal, 137  
Configure Instrument screen,  
internal, oscilloscope, 137  
181  
level, 127  
negative edge, 137  
oscilloscope, 73  
positive edge, 137  
signal, 127  
source, oscilloscope, 137  
Instrument Configure screen,  
preassigned, 51  
160  
releasing, global assignment, 52  
releasing, local assignment, 52  
setting, global, 52  
Time Offset field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 85  
CDMA Generator screen, 85  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
111  
utilities  
catalog memory card, 66  
time, 154  
data collection, 66  
Tune Freq, 112  
time offset measurements, 85  
data collection, transferring  
data, 65  
Tune Freq field  
Time/div field  
RF Analyzer screen, 156  
Oscilloscope screen, 154  
timebase  
printer setup, 66  
tuning  
replot data files, 65  
spectrum analyzer self  
calibration, 65  
channel versus frequency, 40  
channel, automatic, 176  
turning off squelch, 153  
TX Power field  
AF Analyzer screen, 120  
RF Analyzer screen, 120  
TX Pwr Meas field  
RF Analyzer screen, 156  
TX Pwr Zero  
external output, 184  
title  
for printout, 172  
TmOfs field  
uV key, 26  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
85, 111  
Total RAM field  
Configure Instrument screen,  
181  
AF Analyzer screen, 157  
TX Pwr Zero field  
RF Analyzer screen, 157  
trace  
comparison, spectrum analyzer,  
141  
spectrum analyzer, 141  
Track/Fixed field  
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 154  
tracking generator  
enabling, 154  
frequency, 128  
frequency offset, 142  
output, 144  
output port, 144  
sweep, 144  
training, 200  
transmitter power, 36  
measurements, 120  
Peak, 156  
Sample, 156  
zero reference, 157  
Trig Event field  
CDMA Analyzer screen, 112  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
112  
226  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
V
W
X
V key, 26  
W key, 26  
Xon/Xoff, 168  
variable frequency notch filter,  
Walsh Chan field  
Code Domain Analyzer screen,  
113  
141  
version number  
firmware, 167  
web site  
Hewlett-Packard Test and  
Vert Offset field  
Oscilloscope screen, 158  
Measurement  
Organization, 199  
www.tmo.hp.com, 199  
Vert/div field  
Oscilloscope screen, 158  
vertical offset  
oscilloscope, 138, 158  
vertical sensitivity  
oscilloscope, 158  
video averaging  
spectrum analyzer, 140  
VIDEO OUT connector, 194  
voltage  
measurements, 116  
RF, across 50 ohm load, 176  
RF, emf (open circuit), 176  
volume  
beeper, 160, 164  
internal speaker, 152  
Index  
227  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d ex  
Z
zero reference  
transmitter power, 157  
Zeroes  
data source, 99  
zeroing  
power meter, 157  
228  
Index  
Main Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Inc Paint Sprayer 224200 User Manual
Grizzly Kitchen Utensil G5938 User Manual
Halo Lighting System Indoor Furnishings H2573 User Manual
Hasselblad Camera Lens CFE 4 40 IF User Manual
Heath Zenith Work Light SH 5511 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Network Router 359449 001 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Welding System 34521 User Manual
Hughes Stereo System AN6 098P User Manual
Hunter Fan Dehumidifier 33116 User Manual
Hunter Fan Fan 22438 User Manual